config/version: set version to 3.0.5

Signed-off-by: Stephan Raue <stephan@openelec.tv>

.gitignore

@@ -13,5 +13,16 @@
 /tools/mkpkg/*
 !/tools/mkpkg/mkpkg_*
 
+# mkpkg temp
+mkpkg-temp
+
 # private working directory
 /.work/
+
+# symlinks...
+/sources
+/.work
+
+# backup files
+*.orig
+

CHANGELOG

@@ -1,7 +1,5 @@
-OpenELEC - 1.0.1 (21.10.2011)
-- dont start wpa_supplicant in debugmode, this fixes non working wlan connections
-- update DVB firmwares
+OpenELEC (Version 3.0)
 
-OpenELEC - 1.0.0 (20.10.2011)
-- initial version
+for a detailed Changelog from OpenELEC-2.0 to OpenELEC-3.0 see:
+ https://github.com/OpenELEC/OpenELEC.tv/compare/2.0.0...3.0.0
 

Makefile

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-BUILD_DIRS="build.*"
+BUILD_DIRS=build.*
 
 all: system
 
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ release:
 	./scripts/image release
 
 clean:
-	rm -rf $(BUILD_DIRS)
+	rm -rf $(BUILD_DIRS)/* $(BUILD_DIRS)/.stamps
 
 src-pkg:
 	tar cvjf sources.tar.bz2 sources .stamps

README

@@ -1,55 +0,0 @@
-http://www.OpenELEC.tv
-
-OpenELEC - Open Embedded Linux Enterainment Center
-
-OpenELEC runs XBMC, a complete media center solution (xbmc.org).
-The base system has been designed and built from the ground up to be as
-efficient as possible – consuming only a tiny footprint, cutting edge
-hardware support and a set-top box experience.
-
-Source code:
-- https://github.com/OpenELEC/OpenELEC.tv
-
-Installation:
-- Please read INSTALL for instructions how to install.
-
-Known issues:
-- Testing snapshot
-
-Features:
-- System size ~ 90MB
-- Minimal hardware requirements
-- Simple configuration
-
-Software:
-- xbmc HTPC software – View/Manage all your media.
-- samba server – File transfer from any PC client
-- Transmission – bittorrent client
-- IR/Bluetooth Remote Control
-
-Notes:
-- Login details for SSH are user: “root” password: “openelec”
-  SSH allows command line access to your openelec.tv machine for configuration
-  and file transfer. Linux/mac clients can natively use SSH, windows users
-  might want to try PuTTY for their terminal access.
-- $HOME is mounted on /storage (the second ext4 partition on the drive). All
-  data that you transfer to the machine will go here, the rest of the system is
-  read-only with the exception of /var (which contains runtime configuration
-  data).
-- Manual update/downgrade procedure is as follows:
-  Extract the snapshot and navigate to the 'target' directory
-  Copy KERNEL and SYSTEM to the 'Update' network share (or /storage/.update) on
-  your openelec machine.
-  Your system will automatically upgrade during the next reboot.
-- Automatic mounting of filesystems is supported. Devices such as USB Flash
-  Sticks can be plugged into a running machine and will be mounted to /media,
-  showing up in xbmc’s GUI.
-- Comments and questions are more than welcome, help is even better and patches
-  are absolutely perfect!!
-
-Please visit http://www.openelec.tv or log onto our IRC chatroom #openelec on
-freenode.
-
-Happy XBMC'ing
-
-OpenELEC Development Team

README.md

@@ -0,0 +1,88 @@
+[OpenELEC](http://www.openelec.tv)
+
+# OpenELEC - Open Embedded Linux Entertainment Center
+
+OpenELEC runs [XBMC](http://xbmc.org), an award-winning free and open source (GPL) software media 
+player and entertainment hub for digital media. For more info see http://xbmc.org .
+The base system has been designed and built from the ground up to be as 
+efficient as possible – consuming only tiny disk and memory footprints and
+providing cutting edge hardware support to deliver a set-top box experience.
+
+**Source code**
+
+* https://github.com/OpenELEC/OpenELEC.tv
+
+**Installation**
+
+* Please read the instructions in our wiki (http://wiki.openelec.tv/index.php?title=Installation) on how to install.
+
+**Known issues**
+
+* Testing snapshot
+
+**License**
+
+* OpenELEC is released under [GPLv2](http://www.gnu.org/licenses/gpl-2.0.html). Please refer to the "licenses" folder and 
+  source code for clarification on upstream licensing.
+
+**Copyright**
+
+* Since OpenELEC includes code from many up stream projects it includes many 
+  copyright owners. OpenELEC makes NO claim of copyright on any upstream code. 
+  However all OpenELEC authored code is copyright openelec.tv.
+  For a complete copyright list checkout the source code to examine the headers.
+  Unless expressly stated otherwise all code submitted DIRECTLY to the OpenELEC 
+  project (in any form) is licensed under [GPLv2](http://www.gnu.org/licenses/gpl-2.0.html) and the Copyright is donated to 
+  openelec.tv.
+  This allows the project to stay manageable in the long term by giving us the
+  freedom to maintain the code as part of the whole without the management 
+  overhead of preserving contact with every submitter ever e.g. move to GPLv3.
+  You are absolutely free to retain copyright. To retain copyright simply add a 
+  copyright header to every submitted code page.
+  If you are submitting code that is not your own work it is the submitters 
+  responsibility to place a header stating the copyright. 
+
+**Features**
+
+* System size ~ 90 - 130MB
+* Minimal hardware requirements
+* Ultra fast boot
+* Optimized builds for platforms such as ION, Intel, Fusion
+* Simple configuration via XBMC itself
+* Plug and Play external storage
+
+**Software**
+
+* XBMC HTPC software – View/Manage all your media.
+* Samba server – File transfer from any PC client
+* SSH server – Remote console access for debugging
+* IR/Bluetooth Remote Control
+
+**Notes**
+
+* SSH login details are user: “root” password: “openelec”.
+  SSH allows command line access to your openelec.tv machine for configuration
+  and file transfer. Linux/Mac clients can natively use SSH, while Windows
+  users might want to try PuTTY for their terminal access.
+  Starting with OpenELEC 2.0, SSH is disabled by default but all that is needed
+  is an empty “ssh_enable” file to exist in /storage/.config to enable it.
+* $HOME is mounted on /storage (the second ext4 partition on the drive). 
+  All data transfered to the machine will go here, the rest of the system is
+  read-only with the exception of /var (containing runtime configuration data).
+* Manual update/downgrade procedure is as follows:
+  Extract the snapshot and navigate to the 'target' directory.
+  Copy KERNEL and SYSTEM along with KERNEL.md5 and SYSTEM.md5 to the 'Update' network share (or /storage/.update) on
+  your openelec machine. Your system will automatically upgrade during the 
+  next reboot.
+* Automatic mounting of filesystems is supported. Devices such as USB Flash 
+  sticks can be plugged into a running machine and will be mounted to /media,
+  showing up in xbmc’s GUI.
+* Comments and questions are more than welcome, help is even better and patches 
+  are absolutely perfect!!
+
+**Questions/Support**
+
+* Forums on [http://openelec.tv](http://openelec.tv)
+* IRC chatroom **#openelec** on Freenode
+
+**Happy OpenELEC'ing**

TODO

@@ -1,5 +1,2 @@
-openssl-1.0.0(d):
-  - problems using urllib2 in Python -> using openssl-0.9.8
-
 ncurses-5.8/5.9:
   - segfaults in nano and dialog -> using ncurses-5.7

VERSION

@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-1.0.1

config/addon/addon.xml

@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
        provider-name="openelec.tv">
   <requires>
     <import addon="os.openelec.tv" version="@OS_VERSION@"/>
-    <import addon="xbmc.python" version="1.0"/>
+    <import addon="xbmc.python" version="2.0"/>
 @REQUIRES@
   </requires>
   <extension point="@PKG_ADDON_TYPE@"
@@ -17,6 +17,9 @@
     <description>
 @PKG_LONGDESC@
     </description>
+    <disclaimer>
+@PKG_DISCLAIMER@
+    </disclaimer>
     <platform>all</platform>
   </extension>
 </addon>

config/arch.arm

@@ -24,19 +24,31 @@
 
 # determine architecture's family
   case $TARGET_CPU in
+    arm1176jzf-s)
+      TARGET_SUBARCH=armv6zk
+      TARGET_ABI=eabi
+      TARGET_EXTRA_FLAGS="-Wno-psabi -Wa,-mno-warn-deprecated"
+      TARGET_FPU_FLAGS="-mfloat-abi=$TARGET_FLOAT -mfpu=$TARGET_FPU"
+      SIMD_SUPPORT="no"
+      ;;
     cortex-a8)
       TARGET_SUBARCH=armv7-a
       TARGET_ABI=eabi
-      TARGET_FPU="neon"
+      TARGET_EXTRA_FLAGS="-Wno-psabi -Wa,-mno-warn-deprecated"
+      TARGET_FPU_FLAGS="-mfloat-abi=$TARGET_FLOAT -mfpu=$TARGET_FPU"
+      SIMD_SUPPORT="yes"
       ;;
     cortex-a9)
       TARGET_SUBARCH=armv7-a
       TARGET_ABI=eabi
-      TARGET_FPU="neon"
+      TARGET_EXTRA_FLAGS="-Wno-psabi -Wa,-mno-warn-deprecated"
+      TARGET_FPU_FLAGS="-mfloat-abi=$TARGET_FLOAT -mfpu=$TARGET_FPU"
+      SIMD_SUPPORT="yes"
       ;;
   esac
 
 # setup ARCH specific *FLAGS
-  TARGET_CFLAGS="-fPIC -march=$TARGET_SUBARCH -mtune=$TARGET_CPU -mabi=aapcs-linux"
-  [ -n "$TARGET_FPU" ] && TARGET_CFLAGS="$TARGET_CFLAGS -mfpu=$TARGET_FPU"
-  TARGET_LDFLAGS="-fPIC -march=$TARGET_SUBARCH -mtune=$TARGET_CPU"
+  TARGET_CFLAGS="-march=$TARGET_SUBARCH -mcpu=$TARGET_CPU -mabi=aapcs-linux $TARGET_EXTRA_FLAGS"
+  [ -n "$TARGET_FPU" ] && TARGET_CFLAGS="$TARGET_CFLAGS $TARGET_FPU_FLAGS"
+  TARGET_LDFLAGS="-march=$TARGET_SUBARCH -mtune=$TARGET_CPU"
+  GCC_OPTS="--with-abi=aapcs-linux --with-arch=$TARGET_SUBARCH --with-float=$TARGET_FLOAT --with-fpu=$TARGET_FPU"

config/arch.i386

@@ -9,3 +9,6 @@
 # setup ARCH specific *FLAGS
   TARGET_CFLAGS="-march=$TARGET_CPU -m32"
   TARGET_LDFLAGS="-march=$TARGET_CPU -m32"
+
+# build with SIMD support ( yes / no )
+  SIMD_SUPPORT="yes"

config/arch.x86_64

@@ -7,5 +7,8 @@
   TARGET_SUBARCH=x86_64
 
 # setup ARCH specific *FLAGS
-  TARGET_CFLAGS="-fPIC -march=$TARGET_CPU -m64"
-  TARGET_LDFLAGS="-fPIC -march=$TARGET_CPU -m64"
+  TARGET_CFLAGS="-march=$TARGET_CPU -m64"
+  TARGET_LDFLAGS="-march=$TARGET_CPU -m64"
+
+# build with SIMD support ( yes / no )
+  SIMD_SUPPORT="yes"

config/functions

@@ -15,6 +15,7 @@ setup_toolchain() {
     export NM=$TARGET_NM
     export RANLIB=$TARGET_RANLIB
     export OBJCOPY=$TARGET_OBJCOPY
+    export OBJDUMP=$TARGET_OBJDUMP
     export STRIP=$TARGET_STRIP
     export CPPFLAGS="$TARGET_CPPFLAGS"
     export CFLAGS="$TARGET_CFLAGS"
@@ -117,39 +118,39 @@ add_group() {
 do_autoreconf() {
   export ACLOCAL_DIR=$SYSROOT_PREFIX/usr/share/aclocal
 
-  if [ -e $ROOT/$TOOLCHAIN/bin/autoconf ]; then
+  if [ -e "$ROOT/$TOOLCHAIN/bin/autoconf" ]; then
     export AUTOCONF=$ROOT/$TOOLCHAIN/bin/autoconf
   fi
 
-  if [ -e $ROOT/$TOOLCHAIN/bin/automake ]; then
+  if [ -e "$ROOT/$TOOLCHAIN/bin/automake" ]; then
     export AUTOMAKE=$ROOT/$TOOLCHAIN/bin/automake
   fi
 
-  if [ -e $ROOT/$TOOLCHAIN/bin/autopoint ]; then
+  if [ -e "$ROOT/$TOOLCHAIN/bin/autopoint" ]; then
     export AUTOPOINT=$ROOT/$TOOLCHAIN/bin/autopoint
   fi
 
-  if [ -e $ROOT/$TOOLCHAIN/bin/libtoolize ]; then
+  if [ -e "$ROOT/$TOOLCHAIN/bin/libtoolize" ]; then
     export LIBTOOLIZE=$ROOT/$TOOLCHAIN/bin/libtoolize
   fi
 
-  if [ -e $ROOT/$TOOLCHAIN/bin/intltoolize ]; then
+  if [ -e "$ROOT/$TOOLCHAIN/bin/intltoolize" ]; then
     export INTLTOOLIZE=$ROOT/$TOOLCHAIN/bin/intltoolize
   fi
 
-  if [ -e $ROOT/$TOOLCHAIN/bin/aclocal ]; then
+  if [ -e "$ROOT/$TOOLCHAIN/bin/aclocal" ]; then
     export ACLOCAL="$ROOT/$TOOLCHAIN/bin/aclocal -I $ACLOCAL_DIR"
   fi
 
-  if [ -e $ROOT/$TOOLCHAIN/bin/autoheader ]; then
+  if [ -e "$ROOT/$TOOLCHAIN/bin/autoheader" ]; then
     export AUTOHEADER=$ROOT/$TOOLCHAIN/bin/autoheader
   fi
 
-  if [ -e $ROOT/$TOOLCHAIN/bin/libtool ]; then
+  if [ -e "$ROOT/$TOOLCHAIN/bin/libtool" ]; then
     export LIBTOOL=$ROOT/$TOOLCHAIN/bin/libtool
   fi
 
-  if [ -e $ROOT/$TOOLCHAIN/bin/autoreconf -a -e $INTLTOOLIZE ]; then
+  if [ -e "$ROOT/$TOOLCHAIN/bin/autoreconf" -a -e "$INTLTOOLIZE" ]; then
     mkdir -p $ACLOCAL_DIR
     export AUTORECONF="$ROOT/$TOOLCHAIN/bin/autoreconf --verbose --force --install -I $ACLOCAL_DIR"
     $AUTORECONF $@
@@ -170,7 +171,222 @@ strip_linker_plugin() {
 
 strip_gold() {
   # strip out usage from GOLD linker
-  strip_linker_plugin
   LDFLAGS=`echo $LDFLAGS | sed -e "s|-fuse-ld=gold||g"`
 }
 
+fix_module_depends() {
+  # modify .modinfo section in kernel module to depends on other required modules
+  local MODULE="$1"
+  local DEPENDS="$2"
+  local OLD_DEPENDS=""
+  cp ${MODULE} ${MODULE}_orig
+  $OBJDUMP -s -j .modinfo ${MODULE}_orig | awk 'BEGIN{v=0;} /Contents/ {v=1; next;} {if (v==1) print $0;}' >new.modinfo1
+  cat new.modinfo1 | cut -c7-41 | awk '{printf($0);}' | sed 's/ //g;s/../\\\x&/g;' >new.modinfo2
+  /bin/echo -ne `cat new.modinfo2` | tr '\000' '\n' >new.modinfo3
+  cat new.modinfo3 | awk '/^depends=/ {next;} {print $0;}' | tr '\n' '\000' >new.modinfo
+  OLD_DEPENDS=$(awk '{FS="="} /depends=/ {print $2}' new.modinfo3)
+  [ -n "$OLD_DEPENDS" ] && DEPENDS="$OLD_DEPENDS,$DEPENDS"
+  /bin/echo -ne "depends=$DEPENDS\0" >>new.modinfo
+  $OBJCOPY --remove-section=.modinfo --add-section=.modinfo=new.modinfo --set-section-flags .modinfo=contents,alloc,load,readonly,data ${MODULE}_orig ${MODULE}
+  rm new.modinfo*
+}
+
+check_path() {
+dashes="==========================="
+  if [ "${PWD##/usr}" != "${PWD}" ]; then
+    check_pathmessage="$check_pathmessage\n $dashes$dashes$dashes"
+    check_pathmessage="$check_pathmessage\n ERROR: You try to build inside /usr"
+    check_pathmessage="$check_pathmessage\n $dashes$dashes$dashes"
+    check_pathmessage="$check_pathmessage\n This is not supported with our buildsystem."
+    check_pathmessage="$check_pathmessage\n Please use another dir (for example your \$HOME) to build $DISTRONAME"
+
+    echo -e $check_pathmessage
+    exit 1
+  fi
+}
+
+check_config() {
+dashes="==========================="
+  if [ ! -d $PROJECT_DIR/$PROJECT ]; then
+    check_project="$check_project\n $dashes$dashes$dashes"
+    check_project="$check_project\n ERROR: Project not found, use a valid project or create a new config"
+    check_project="$check_project\n $dashes$dashes$dashes"
+    check_project="$check_project\n\n Valid projects:"
+
+    for projects in $PROJECT_DIR/*; do
+      check_project="$check_project\n - $(basename $projects)"
+    done
+    echo -e $check_project
+    exit 1
+  fi
+
+  if [ ! -f $PROJECT_DIR/$PROJECT/linux/linux.$TARGET_ARCH.conf ]; then
+    check_arch="$check_arch\n $dashes$dashes$dashes"
+    check_arch="$check_arch\n ERROR: Architecture not found, use a valid Architecture"
+    check_arch="$check_arch\n for your project or create a new config"
+    check_arch="$check_arch\n $dashes$dashes$dashes"
+    check_arch="$check_arch\n\n Valid Architectures for your project: $PROJECT"
+
+    for arch in $PROJECT_DIR/$PROJECT/linux/*.conf; do
+      check_arch="$check_arch\n - $(basename $arch | cut -f2 -d".")"
+    done
+    echo -e $check_arch
+    exit 1
+  fi
+}
+
+show_config() {
+  dashes="==========================="
+  config_message="$config_message\n $dashes$dashes$dashes"
+  config_message="$config_message\n Configuration for $DISTRONAME ($([ "$OFFICIAL" = "yes" ] && echo "official" || echo "unofficial"))"
+  config_message="$config_message\n $dashes$dashes$dashes"
+
+  # Build options
+
+  config_message="$config_message\n\n Buildoptions:"
+  config_message="$config_message\n $dashes$dashes"
+
+  config_message="$config_message\n - CPU (ARCH):\t\t\t\t $TARGET_CPU ($TARGET_ARCH)"
+  config_message="$config_message\n - FLOAT:\t\t\t\t $TARGET_FLOAT"
+  config_message="$config_message\n - FPU:\t\t\t\t\t $TARGET_FPU"
+  config_message="$config_message\n - SIMD support:\t\t\t $SIMD_SUPPORT"
+  config_message="$config_message\n - Optimizations:\t\t\t $OPTIMIZATIONS"
+  config_message="$config_message\n - LTO (Link Time Optimization) support: $LTO_SUPPORT"
+  config_message="$config_message\n - GOLD (Google Linker) Support:\t $GOLD_SUPPORT"
+  config_message="$config_message\n - LLVM support:\t\t\t $LLVM_SUPPORT"
+
+  # config_message="$config_message\n - CFLAGS:\t $TARGET_CFLAGS"
+  # config_message="$config_message\n - LDFLAGS:\t $TARGET_LDFLAGS"
+
+  # Graphic configuration
+
+  config_message="$config_message\n\n Graphic configuration:"
+  config_message="$config_message\n $dashes$dashes"
+
+  config_message="$config_message\n - XORG support:\t\t\t $XORG_SUPPORT"
+  config_message="$config_message\n - XORG Composite support:\t\t $COMPOSITE_SUPPORT"
+  config_message="$config_message\n - XORG Xinerama support:\t\t $XINERAMA_SUPPORT"
+  config_message="$config_message\n - SDL support:\t\t\t\t $SDL_SUPPORT"
+  config_message="$config_message\n - OpenGL (GLX) support (provider):\t $OPENGL_SUPPORT ($OPENGL)"
+  config_message="$config_message\n - OpenGLES support (provider):\t\t $OPENGLES_SUPPORT ($OPENGLES)"
+  config_message="$config_message\n - WindowManager:\t\t\t $WINDOWMANAGER"
+  config_message="$config_message\n - Xorg Graphic Drivers:\t\t $GRAPHIC_DRIVERS"
+
+  # Hardware decoder support
+
+  config_message="$config_message\n\n Hardware decoder configuration:"
+  config_message="$config_message\n $dashes$dashes"
+
+  config_message="$config_message\n - Broadcom CrystalHD Decoder:\t\t $CRYSTALHD"
+  config_message="$config_message\n - OpenMAX Support (provider):\t\t $OPENMAX_SUPPORT ($OPENMAX)"
+  config_message="$config_message\n - VAAPI Support:\t\t\t $VAAPI"
+  config_message="$config_message\n - VDPAU Support:\t\t\t $VDPAU"
+  config_message="$config_message\n - XVBA Support:\t\t\t $XVBA"
+
+  # Input device configuration
+
+  config_message="$config_message\n\n Input device configuration:"
+  config_message="$config_message\n $dashes$dashes"
+
+  config_message="$config_message\n - Remote support:\t\t\t $REMOTE_SUPPORT"
+  config_message="$config_message\n - ATV Remote support:\t\t\t $ATVCLIENT_SUPPORT"
+  config_message="$config_message\n - CEC Adapter support:\t\t\t $CEC_SUPPORT"
+  config_message="$config_message\n - IRTrans support:\t\t\t $IRSERVER_SUPPORT"
+  config_message="$config_message\n - XBMC Joystick support:\t\t $JOYSTICK_SUPPORT"
+
+  # Misc. hardware configuration
+
+  config_message="$config_message\n\n Misc. hardware configuration:"
+  config_message="$config_message\n $dashes$dashes"
+
+  config_message="$config_message\n - ALSA support:\t\t\t $ALSA_SUPPORT"
+  config_message="$config_message\n - Pulseaudio support:\t\t\t $PULSEAUDIO_SUPPORT"
+  config_message="$config_message\n - Blu-Ray support:\t\t\t $BLURAY_SUPPORT"
+  config_message="$config_message\n - Bluetooth support:\t\t\t $BLUETOOTH_SUPPORT"
+  config_message="$config_message\n - Hardware Sensors support:\t\t $SENSOR_SUPPORT"
+  config_message="$config_message\n - LCD drivers:\t\t\t\t $LCD_DRIVER"
+
+  for config_driver in $ADDITIONAL_DRIVERS; do
+    config_message="$config_message\n - Include driver:\t\t\t $config_driver"
+  done
+
+  for config_firmware in $FIRMWARE; do
+    config_message="$config_message\n - Include firmware:\t\t\t $config_firmware"
+  done
+
+  # Network service configuration
+
+  config_message="$config_message\n\n Network service configuration:"
+  config_message="$config_message\n $dashes$dashes"
+
+  config_message="$config_message\n - Avahi (Zeroconf) support:\t\t $AVAHI_DAEMON"
+  config_message="$config_message\n - SAMBA server support:\t\t $SAMBA_SERVER"
+  config_message="$config_message\n - SFTP server support:\t\t\t $SFTP_SERVER"
+  config_message="$config_message\n - SSH Guard support:\t\t\t $SSHGUARD_SUPPORT"
+  config_message="$config_message\n - PPTP support:\t\t\t $PPTP_SUPPORT"
+  config_message="$config_message\n - OpenVPN support:\t\t\t $OPENVPN_SUPPORT"
+  config_message="$config_message\n - XBMC Airplay support:\t\t $AIRPLAY_SUPPORT"
+  config_message="$config_message\n - XBMC Airtunes support:\t\t $AIRTUNES_SUPPORT"
+  config_message="$config_message\n - XBMC AFP support:\t\t\t $AFP_SUPPORT"
+  config_message="$config_message\n - XBMC NFS support:\t\t\t $NFS_SUPPORT"
+  config_message="$config_message\n - XBMC SAMBA client support:\t\t $SAMBA_CLIENT"
+  config_message="$config_message\n - XBMC Webserver support:\t\t $WEBSERVER"
+
+  # OS configuration
+
+  config_message="$config_message\n\n OS configuration:"
+  config_message="$config_message\n $dashes$dashes"
+
+  config_message="$config_message\n - OEM Support:\t\t\t\t $OEM_SUPPORT"
+  config_message="$config_message\n - Default Hostname:\t\t\t $HOSTNAME"
+  config_message="$config_message\n - Default ROOT Password:\t\t $ROOT_PASSWORD"
+  config_message="$config_message\n - Bootloader:\t\t\t\t $BOOTLOADER"
+if [ "$BOOTLOADER" = "u-boot" ]; then
+  config_message="$config_message\n - U-Boot configuration:\t\t $UBOOT_CONFIG"
+  config_message="$config_message\n - U-Boot config file:\t\t\t $UBOOT_CONFIGFILE"
+fi
+  config_message="$config_message\n - UDisks support:\t\t\t $UDISKS"
+  config_message="$config_message\n - UPower support:\t\t\t $UPOWER"
+  config_message="$config_message\n - Update support:\t\t\t $UPDATE_SUPPORT"
+  config_message="$config_message\n - Installer support:\t\t\t $INSTALLER_SUPPORT"
+
+  # Misc. Filesystems
+
+  config_message="$config_message\n\n Misc. Filesystems:"
+  config_message="$config_message\n $dashes$dashes"
+
+  config_message="$config_message\n - Swap Support:\t\t\t $SWAP_SUPPORT"
+if [ "$SWAP_SUPPORT" = "yes" ]; then
+  config_message="$config_message\n - Swapfile default size:\t\t $SWAPFILESIZE"
+fi
+  config_message="$config_message\n - exFAT Support (via Fuse):\t\t $EXFAT"
+  config_message="$config_message\n - NTFS Support (via Fuse):\t\t $NTFS3G"
+  config_message="$config_message\n - Install HFS Tools:\t\t\t $HFSTOOLS"
+
+  # XBMC configuration
+
+  config_message="$config_message\n\n XBMC configuration:"
+  config_message="$config_message\n $dashes$dashes"
+
+  config_message="$config_message\n - XBMC version:\t\t\t $MEDIACENTER"
+  config_message="$config_message\n - XBMC nonfree support:\t\t $NONFREE_SUPPORT"
+  config_message="$config_message\n - XBMC DVDCSS support:\t\t\t $DVDCSS_SUPPORT"
+
+  for config_skin in $SKINS; do
+    config_message="$config_message\n - Include Skin:\t\t\t $config_skin"
+  done
+
+  config_message="$config_message\n - Default Skin:\t\t\t $SKIN_DEFAULT"
+  config_message="$config_message\n - Include extra fonts:\t\t\t $XBMC_EXTRA_FONTS"
+  config_message="$config_message\n - Include RSXS Screensaver:\t\t $XBMC_SCR_RSXS"
+  config_message="$config_message\n - Include ProjectM Visualization:\t $XBMC_VIS_PROJECTM"
+  config_message="$config_message\n - Include Goom Visualization:\t\t $XBMC_VIS_GOOM"
+
+  config_message="$config_message\n"
+  config_message="$config_message\n $dashes$dashes$dashes"
+  config_message="$config_message\n End Configuration for $DISTRONAME"
+  config_message="$config_message\n $dashes$dashes$dashes"
+  config_message="$config_message\n\n\n"
+
+  echo -e $config_message
+}

config/graphic

@@ -1,16 +1,57 @@
+if [ "$DISPLAYSERVER" = "xorg-server" ]; then
+  SDL_SUPPORT="yes"
+else
+  SDL_SUPPORT="no"
+fi
+
+if [ "$OPENGL" = no ]; then
+  OPENGL_SUPPORT="no"
+else
+  OPENGL_SUPPORT="yes"
+fi
+
+if [ "$OPENGLES" = no ]; then
+  OPENGLES_SUPPORT="no"
+else
+  OPENGLES_SUPPORT="yes"
+fi
+
+if [ "$SDL_SUPPORT" = no ]; then
+  JOYSTICK_SUPPORT="no"
+fi
+
+if [ "$OPENMAX" = no ]; then
+  OPENMAX_SUPPORT="no"
+else
+  OPENMAX_SUPPORT="yes"
+fi
+
+if [ "$OPENGL_SUPPORT" = no ]; then
+  XBMC_SCR_RSXS="no"
+  XBMC_VIS_PROJECTM="no"
+  XBMC_VIS_GOOM="no"
+fi
+
 get_graphicdrivers() {
   if [ "$GRAPHIC_DRIVERS" = "all" ]; then
-    GRAPHIC_DRIVERS="i915 i965 r200 r300 r600 fglrx nvidia vmware"
+    GRAPHIC_DRIVERS="i915 i965 r200 r300 r600 fglrx fglrx-legacy nvidia vmware virtualbox"
   fi
 
   for drv in $GRAPHIC_DRIVERS; do
+    if [ "$drv" = "dove" ]; then
+      XORG_DRIVERS="$XORG_DRIVERS dove"
+    fi
+
     if [ "$drv" = "fglrx" ]; then
-      DRI_DRIVERS="$DRI_DRIVERS"
-      GALLIUM_DRIVERS="$GALLIUM_DRIVERS"
       XORG_DRIVERS="$XORG_DRIVERS fglrx"
       COMPOSITE_SUPPORT="yes"
       XINERAMA_SUPPORT="yes"
-#      LLVM_SUPPORT="yes"
+    fi
+
+    if [ "$drv" = "fglrx-legacy" ]; then
+      XORG_DRIVERS="$XORG_DRIVERS fglrx-legacy"
+      COMPOSITE_SUPPORT="yes"
+      XINERAMA_SUPPORT="yes"
     fi
 
     if [ "$drv" = "i915" ]; then
@@ -22,9 +63,7 @@ get_graphicdrivers() {
 
     if [ "$drv" = "i965" ]; then
       DRI_DRIVERS="$DRI_DRIVERS,i965"
-#      GALLIUM_DRIVERS="$GALLIUM_DRIVERS,i965"
       XORG_DRIVERS="$XORG_DRIVERS intel"
-#      LLVM_SUPPORT="yes"
     fi
 
     if [ "$drv" = "nouveau" ]; then
@@ -35,11 +74,19 @@ get_graphicdrivers() {
     fi
 
     if [ "$drv" = "nvidia" ]; then
-      DRI_DRIVERS="$DRI_DRIVERS"
-      GALLIUM_DRIVERS="$GALLIUM_DRIVERS"
       XORG_DRIVERS="$XORG_DRIVERS nvidia"
       XINERAMA_SUPPORT="yes"
-#      LLVM_SUPPORT="yes"
+    fi
+
+    if [ "$drv" = "nvidia-legacy" ]; then
+      XORG_DRIVERS="$XORG_DRIVERS nvidia-legacy"
+      XINERAMA_SUPPORT="yes"
+    fi
+
+    if [ "$drv" = "virtualbox" ]; then
+      DRI_DRIVERS="$DRI_DRIVERS,swrast"
+      XORG_DRIVERS="$XORG_DRIVERS virtualbox"
+      XINERAMA_SUPPORT="yes"
     fi
 
     if [ "$drv" = "omapfb" ]; then
@@ -51,26 +98,25 @@ get_graphicdrivers() {
 
     if [ "$drv" = "r200" ]; then
       DRI_DRIVERS="$DRI_DRIVERS,r200"
-#      GALLIUM_DRIVERS="$GALLIUM_DRIVERS,r200"
       XORG_DRIVERS="$XORG_DRIVERS ati"
-#      LLVM_SUPPORT="yes"
     fi
 
     if [ "$drv" = "r300" ]; then
-#      DRI_DRIVERS="$DRI_DRIVERS,r300"
       GALLIUM_DRIVERS="$GALLIUM_DRIVERS,r300"
       XORG_DRIVERS="$XORG_DRIVERS ati"
       LLVM_SUPPORT="yes"
     fi
 
     if [ "$drv" = "r600" ]; then
-#      DRI_DRIVERS="$DRI_DRIVERS,r600"
       GALLIUM_DRIVERS="$GALLIUM_DRIVERS,r600"
       XORG_DRIVERS="$XORG_DRIVERS ati"
       LLVM_SUPPORT="yes"
     fi
 
     if [ "$drv" = "vmware" ]; then
+      DRI_DRIVERS="$DRI_DRIVERS,swrast"
+      GALLIUM_DRIVERS="$GALLIUM_DRIVERS,svga"
+      XORG_DRIVERS="$XORG_DRIVERS vmware"
       XINERAMA_SUPPORT="yes"
 #      LLVM_SUPPORT="yes"
     fi

config/optimize

@@ -18,26 +18,14 @@ fi
 
 if [ "$OPTIMIZATIONS" = size ];then
   GCC_OPTIM="$GCC_OPTIM -Os"
-  LD_OPTIM=""
-fi
-
-if [ "$LOOP_SUPPORT" = yes ];then
-  GCC_OPTIM="$GCC_OPTIM -ftree-loop-distribution"
-  GCC_OPTIM="$GCC_OPTIM -floop-interchange"
-  GCC_OPTIM="$GCC_OPTIM -floop-strip-mine"
-  GCC_OPTIM="$GCC_OPTIM -floop-block"
-fi
-
-if [ "$GRAPHITE_SUPPORT" = yes ];then
-  GCC_OPTIM="$GCC_OPTIM -fgraphite-identity"
-fi
-
-if [ "$LTO_SUPPORT" = yes -o "$GOLD_SUPPORT" = yes ];then
-  LD_OPTIM="$LD_OPTIM -fuse-linker-plugin"
+  GCC_OPTIM="$GCC_OPTIM -fexcess-precision=fast"
+  GCC_OPTIM="$GCC_OPTIM -ffast-math"
+  LD_OPTIM="-Wl,--as-needed"
 fi
 
 if [ "$LTO_SUPPORT" = yes ];then
   GCC_OPTIM="$GCC_OPTIM -flto"
+  LD_OPTIM="$LD_OPTIM -fuse-linker-plugin"
   LD_OPTIM="$LD_OPTIM -flto"
 fi
 
@@ -101,12 +89,3 @@ HOST_LIBDIR="$ROOT/$TOOLCHAIN/lib"
   # default dirs
     HOST_LIBDIR="$HOST_LIBDIR /lib /usr/lib"
     HOST_INCDIR="$ROOT/$TOOLCHAIN/include /usr/include"
-
-# use -fPIC when necessary
-  case "`uname -m`" in
-    x86_64|ppc64|arm|armeb|armel)
-      HOST_CFLAGS="$HOST_CFLAGS -fPIC"
-      HOST_CXXFLAGS="$HOST_CXXFLAGS -fPIC"
-      HOST_LDFLAGS="$HOST_LDFLAGS -fPIC"
-    ;;
-  esac

config/options

@@ -1,3 +1,6 @@
+# set default language for buildsystem
+  export LC_ALL=C
+
 # determines PROJECT, if not forced by user
 # default is Generic
 if [ -z "$PROJECT" ]; then
@@ -17,15 +20,8 @@ fi
 ROOT=`pwd`
 PROJECT_DIR="$ROOT/projects"
 
-OPENELEC_VERSION=`cat VERSION`
-
-if [ "$OPENELEC_VERSION" = "devel" ]; then
-  OS_VERSION="1.0"
-else
-  OS_MAJOR_VERSION=`echo "$OPENELEC_VERSION" | cut -f1 -d "."`
-  OS_MINOR_VERSION=`echo "$OPENELEC_VERSION" | cut -f2 -d "."`
-  OS_VERSION="$OS_MAJOR_VERSION.$OS_MINOR_VERSION"
-fi
+# include versioning
+  . config/version
 
 # read project options if available
  if [ -f "$PROJECT_DIR/$PROJECT/options" ]; then
@@ -35,6 +31,10 @@ fi
 # Target system library C (eglibc)
   TARGET_LIBC="eglibc"
 
+# Target iconv implementation (libiconv)
+# leave empty if we are using glibc's gconv
+  ICONV=""
+
 # Library strip
   LIBSTRIP="yes"
 
@@ -62,16 +62,14 @@ fi
 # value in gigabytes, megabytes or kilobytes by appending a G, M or K to the
 # value. The default is gigabytes. The actual value stored is rounded down to
 # the nearest multiple of 16 kilobytes.
-  CCACHE_CACHE_SIZE="10G"
+  CCACHE_CACHE_SIZE="30G"
 
 # forcing install of all packages (yes/no)
   FORCE_INSTALL="no"
 
-# set jpeg library depending on ARCH
-  if [ "$TARGET_ARCH" = "i386" -o "$TARGET_ARCH" = "x86_64" ]; then
-    LIBJPEG="libjpeg-turbo"
-  else
-    LIBJPEG="jpeg"
+# install devtools on development builds
+  if [ "$OPENELEC_VERSION" = "devel" ]; then
+    DEVTOOLS=yes
   fi
 
 # read options from $HOME if available

config/path

@@ -10,7 +10,9 @@ set -e
   ADDONS=addons
 
 # include ARCH specific options
-  . config/arch.$TARGET_ARCH
+  if [ -f config/arch.$TARGET_ARCH ]; then
+    . config/arch.$TARGET_ARCH
+  fi
 
 HOST_NAME=`$LOCAL_CC -dumpmachine`
 TARGET_NAME=$(echo $TARGET_SUBARCH | sed -e "s,-,,")-openelec-linux-gnu${TARGET_ABI}
@@ -32,10 +34,6 @@ FAKEROOT_SCRIPT=$ROOT/.fakeroot.$PROJECT.$TARGET_ARCH
 
 . config/sources
 
-if [ "$OPENELEC_VERSION" = devel ]; then
-  DEVTOOLS=yes
-fi
-
 MAKE="$ROOT/$TOOLCHAIN/bin/make"
 MAKEINSTALL="$ROOT/$TOOLCHAIN/bin/make -j1 DESTDIR=$SYSROOT_PREFIX install"
 SED="sed -i"
@@ -56,7 +54,14 @@ SED="sed -i"
   PKG_LONGDESC=""
   PKG_IS_ADDON="no"
 
-  [ -n "$1" ] && PKG_DIR=`find $PACKAGES -type d -name $1 2>/dev/null`
+  if [ -n "$1" ]; then
+    PKG_DIR=`find $PACKAGES -type d -name $1 ! -wholename \*\/source\/\* 2>/dev/null`
+    if [ "${PKG_DIR}" != "$(echo $PKG_DIR | tr -d '\n')" ]; then
+      echo "Error - multiple package folders:"
+      echo "$PKG_DIR"
+      exit 1
+    fi
+  fi
 
   [ -r $PKG_DIR/meta ] && . $PKG_DIR/meta
   [ "$PKG_IS_ADDON" = "yes" ] && PKG_ADDON_ID="`echo $PKG_SECTION | sed 's,/,.,g'`.$PKG_NAME"
@@ -71,6 +76,8 @@ XORG_PATH_RGB=/usr/lib/X11/rgb
 XORG_PATH_MODULES=/usr/lib/xorg/modules
 XORG_PATH_DRIVERS=/usr/lib/xorg/modules/drivers
 
+SSL_CERTIFICATES="/etc/pki/tls"
+
 TOOLCHAIN_LANGUAGES=c
 [ "$TOOLCHAIN_CXX" = yes ] && TOOLCHAIN_LANGUAGES=${TOOLCHAIN_LANGUAGES},c++
 
@@ -82,6 +89,7 @@ TARGET_AR=${TARGET_PREFIX}ar
 TARGET_NM=${TARGET_PREFIX}nm
 TARGET_RANLIB=${TARGET_PREFIX}ranlib
 TARGET_OBJCOPY=${TARGET_PREFIX}objcopy
+TARGET_OBJDUMP=${TARGET_PREFIX}objdump
 TARGET_STRIP=${TARGET_PREFIX}strip
 
 . config/optimize
@@ -105,7 +113,9 @@ HOST_PKG_CONFIG_PATH=""
 HOST_PKG_CONFIG_LIBDIR="$ROOT/$TOOLCHAIN/lib/pkgconfig:$ROOT/$TOOLCHAIN/share/pkgconfig"
 HOST_PKG_CONFIG_SYSROOT_DIR=""
 
-export CCACHE_DIR=$ROOT/$BUILD/.ccache
+if [ -z "$CCACHE_DIR" ]; then
+    export CCACHE_DIR=$HOME/.ccache-openelec
+fi
 export MAKEFLAGS=-j$CONCURRENCY_MAKE_LEVEL
 export PKG_CONFIG=$ROOT/$TOOLCHAIN/bin/pkg-config
 
@@ -113,9 +123,16 @@ if [ -z "$PATH" -o "$PATH" = "${PATH#$ROOT/$TOOLCHAIN/bin:}" ]; then
   export PATH="$ROOT/$TOOLCHAIN/bin:$PATH"
 fi
 
+if [ -z "$LD_LIBRARY_PATH" -o "$LD_LIBRARY_PATH" = "${LD_LIBRARY_PATH#$ROOT/$TOOLCHAIN/lib:}" ]; then
+  export LD_LIBRARY_PATH="$ROOT/$TOOLCHAIN/lib:$LD_LIBRARY_PATH"
+fi
+
 VERSION_SUFFIX=$TARGET_ARCH
 . config/functions
 
+check_path
+check_config
+
 setup_toolchain target
 
 SILENT_OUT=3
@@ -127,4 +144,4 @@ else
   exec 3>&2
   exec 4>/dev/null
 fi
-INDENT_SIZE=4
+BUILD_INDENT_SIZE=4

config/release/3rdparty/syslinux/README

@@ -1,34 +0,0 @@
-See the files in the doc directory for documentation about SYSLINUX:
-
-	syslinux.txt	    - Usage instructions; manual.
-	distrib.txt	    - For creators of Linux distributions.
-	pxelinux.txt	    - Documentation specific to PXELINUX.
-	isolinux.txt	    - Documentation specific to ISOLINUX.
-	extlinux.txt	    - Documentation specific to EXTLINUX.
-	menu.txt	    - About the menu systems.
-	usbkey.txt	    - About using SYSLINUX on USB keys.
-	comboot.txt	    - About the extension API.
-	memdisk.txt         - Documentation about MEMDISK.
-
-Also see the files:
-
-	NEWS		    - List of changes from previous releases.
-	TODO		    - About features planned for future releases.
-	COPYING		    - For the license terms of this software.
-
-SYSLINUX now builds in a Linux environment, using nasm.  You need nasm
-version 2.03 or later (2.07 or later recommended) to build SYSLINUX
-from source.  See http://www.nasm.us/ for information about nasm.
-
-There is now a mailing list for SYSLINUX.  See the end of syslinux.txt
-for details.
-
-SYSLINUX is:
-
-   Copyright 1994-2010 H. Peter Anvin et al - All Rights Reserved
-
-   This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
-   it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
-   the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 53 Temple Place Ste 330,
-   Boston MA 02111-1307, USA; either version 2 of the License, or
-   (at your option) any later version; incorporated herein by reference.

config/release/3rdparty/syslinux/doc/CodingStyle.txt

@@ -1,831 +0,0 @@
-Syslinux uses Linux kernel coding style, except that we are "heretic"
-in the sense of using 4 spaces instead of 8 for indentation.
-
-This coding style will be applied after the 3.81 release.
-
-
-	  -------------------------------------------------
-
-		Linux kernel coding style
-
-This is a short document describing the preferred coding style for the
-linux kernel.  Coding style is very personal, and I won't _force_ my
-views on anybody, but this is what goes for anything that I have to be
-able to maintain, and I'd prefer it for most other things too.  Please
-at least consider the points made here.
-
-First off, I'd suggest printing out a copy of the GNU coding standards,
-and NOT read it.  Burn them, it's a great symbolic gesture.
-
-Anyway, here goes:
-
-
-	 	Chapter 1: Indentation
-
-Tabs are 8 characters, and thus indentations are also 8 characters.
-There are heretic movements that try to make indentations 4 (or even 2!)
-characters deep, and that is akin to trying to define the value of PI to
-be 3.
-
-Rationale: The whole idea behind indentation is to clearly define where
-a block of control starts and ends.  Especially when you've been looking
-at your screen for 20 straight hours, you'll find it a lot easier to see
-how the indentation works if you have large indentations.
-
-Now, some people will claim that having 8-character indentations makes
-the code move too far to the right, and makes it hard to read on a
-80-character terminal screen.  The answer to that is that if you need
-more than 3 levels of indentation, you're screwed anyway, and should fix
-your program.
-
-In short, 8-char indents make things easier to read, and have the added
-benefit of warning you when you're nesting your functions too deep.
-Heed that warning.
-
-The preferred way to ease multiple indentation levels in a switch statement is
-to align the "switch" and its subordinate "case" labels in the same column
-instead of "double-indenting" the "case" labels.  E.g.:
-
-	switch (suffix) {
-	case 'G':
-	case 'g':
-		mem <<= 30;
-		break;
-	case 'M':
-	case 'm':
-		mem <<= 20;
-		break;
-	case 'K':
-	case 'k':
-		mem <<= 10;
-		/* fall through */
-	default:
-		break;
-	}
-
-
-Don't put multiple statements on a single line unless you have
-something to hide:
-
-	if (condition) do_this;
-	  do_something_everytime;
-
-Don't put multiple assignments on a single line either.  Kernel coding style
-is super simple.  Avoid tricky expressions.
-
-Outside of comments, documentation and except in Kconfig, spaces are never
-used for indentation, and the above example is deliberately broken.
-
-Get a decent editor and don't leave whitespace at the end of lines.
-
-
-		Chapter 2: Breaking long lines and strings
-
-Coding style is all about readability and maintainability using commonly
-available tools.
-
-The limit on the length of lines is 80 columns and this is a strongly
-preferred limit.
-
-Statements longer than 80 columns will be broken into sensible chunks.
-Descendants are always substantially shorter than the parent and are placed
-substantially to the right. The same applies to function headers with a long
-argument list. Long strings are as well broken into shorter strings. The
-only exception to this is where exceeding 80 columns significantly increases
-readability and does not hide information.
-
-void fun(int a, int b, int c)
-{
-	if (condition)
-		printk(KERN_WARNING "Warning this is a long printk with "
-						"3 parameters a: %u b: %u "
-						"c: %u \n", a, b, c);
-	else
-		next_statement;
-}
-
-		Chapter 3: Placing Braces and Spaces
-
-The other issue that always comes up in C styling is the placement of
-braces.  Unlike the indent size, there are few technical reasons to
-choose one placement strategy over the other, but the preferred way, as
-shown to us by the prophets Kernighan and Ritchie, is to put the opening
-brace last on the line, and put the closing brace first, thusly:
-
-	if (x is true) {
-		we do y
-	}
-
-This applies to all non-function statement blocks (if, switch, for,
-while, do).  E.g.:
-
-	switch (action) {
-	case KOBJ_ADD:
-		return "add";
-	case KOBJ_REMOVE:
-		return "remove";
-	case KOBJ_CHANGE:
-		return "change";
-	default:
-		return NULL;
-	}
-
-However, there is one special case, namely functions: they have the
-opening brace at the beginning of the next line, thus:
-
-	int function(int x)
-	{
-		body of function
-	}
-
-Heretic people all over the world have claimed that this inconsistency
-is ...  well ...  inconsistent, but all right-thinking people know that
-(a) K&R are _right_ and (b) K&R are right.  Besides, functions are
-special anyway (you can't nest them in C).
-
-Note that the closing brace is empty on a line of its own, _except_ in
-the cases where it is followed by a continuation of the same statement,
-ie a "while" in a do-statement or an "else" in an if-statement, like
-this:
-
-	do {
-		body of do-loop
-	} while (condition);
-
-and
-
-	if (x == y) {
-		..
-	} else if (x > y) {
-		...
-	} else {
-		....
-	}
-
-Rationale: K&R.
-
-Also, note that this brace-placement also minimizes the number of empty
-(or almost empty) lines, without any loss of readability.  Thus, as the
-supply of new-lines on your screen is not a renewable resource (think
-25-line terminal screens here), you have more empty lines to put
-comments on.
-
-Do not unnecessarily use braces where a single statement will do.
-
-if (condition)
-	action();
-
-This does not apply if one branch of a conditional statement is a single
-statement. Use braces in both branches.
-
-if (condition) {
-	do_this();
-	do_that();
-} else {
-	otherwise();
-}
-
-		3.1:  Spaces
-
-Linux kernel style for use of spaces depends (mostly) on
-function-versus-keyword usage.  Use a space after (most) keywords.  The
-notable exceptions are sizeof, typeof, alignof, and __attribute__, which look
-somewhat like functions (and are usually used with parentheses in Linux,
-although they are not required in the language, as in: "sizeof info" after
-"struct fileinfo info;" is declared).
-
-So use a space after these keywords:
-	if, switch, case, for, do, while
-but not with sizeof, typeof, alignof, or __attribute__.  E.g.,
-	s = sizeof(struct file);
-
-Do not add spaces around (inside) parenthesized expressions.  This example is
-*bad*:
-
-	s = sizeof( struct file );
-
-When declaring pointer data or a function that returns a pointer type, the
-preferred use of '*' is adjacent to the data name or function name and not
-adjacent to the type name.  Examples:
-
-	char *linux_banner;
-	unsigned long long memparse(char *ptr, char **retptr);
-	char *match_strdup(substring_t *s);
-
-Use one space around (on each side of) most binary and ternary operators,
-such as any of these:
-
-	=  +  -  <  >  *  /  %  |  &  ^  <=  >=  ==  !=  ?  :
-
-but no space after unary operators:
-	&  *  +  -  ~  !  sizeof  typeof  alignof  __attribute__  defined
-
-no space before the postfix increment & decrement unary operators:
-	++  --
-
-no space after the prefix increment & decrement unary operators:
-	++  --
-
-and no space around the '.' and "->" structure member operators.
-
-Do not leave trailing whitespace at the ends of lines.  Some editors with
-"smart" indentation will insert whitespace at the beginning of new lines as
-appropriate, so you can start typing the next line of code right away.
-However, some such editors do not remove the whitespace if you end up not
-putting a line of code there, such as if you leave a blank line.  As a result,
-you end up with lines containing trailing whitespace.
-
-Git will warn you about patches that introduce trailing whitespace, and can
-optionally strip the trailing whitespace for you; however, if applying a series
-of patches, this may make later patches in the series fail by changing their
-context lines.
-
-
-		Chapter 4: Naming
-
-C is a Spartan language, and so should your naming be.  Unlike Modula-2
-and Pascal programmers, C programmers do not use cute names like
-ThisVariableIsATemporaryCounter.  A C programmer would call that
-variable "tmp", which is much easier to write, and not the least more
-difficult to understand.
-
-HOWEVER, while mixed-case names are frowned upon, descriptive names for
-global variables are a must.  To call a global function "foo" is a
-shooting offense.
-
-GLOBAL variables (to be used only if you _really_ need them) need to
-have descriptive names, as do global functions.  If you have a function
-that counts the number of active users, you should call that
-"count_active_users()" or similar, you should _not_ call it "cntusr()".
-
-Encoding the type of a function into the name (so-called Hungarian
-notation) is brain damaged - the compiler knows the types anyway and can
-check those, and it only confuses the programmer.  No wonder MicroSoft
-makes buggy programs.
-
-LOCAL variable names should be short, and to the point.  If you have
-some random integer loop counter, it should probably be called "i".
-Calling it "loop_counter" is non-productive, if there is no chance of it
-being mis-understood.  Similarly, "tmp" can be just about any type of
-variable that is used to hold a temporary value.
-
-If you are afraid to mix up your local variable names, you have another
-problem, which is called the function-growth-hormone-imbalance syndrome.
-See chapter 6 (Functions).
-
-
-		Chapter 5: Typedefs
-
-Please don't use things like "vps_t".
-
-It's a _mistake_ to use typedef for structures and pointers. When you see a
-
-	vps_t a;
-
-in the source, what does it mean?
-
-In contrast, if it says
-
-	struct virtual_container *a;
-
-you can actually tell what "a" is.
-
-Lots of people think that typedefs "help readability". Not so. They are
-useful only for:
-
- (a) totally opaque objects (where the typedef is actively used to _hide_
-     what the object is).
-
-     Example: "pte_t" etc. opaque objects that you can only access using
-     the proper accessor functions.
-
-     NOTE! Opaqueness and "accessor functions" are not good in themselves.
-     The reason we have them for things like pte_t etc. is that there
-     really is absolutely _zero_ portably accessible information there.
-
- (b) Clear integer types, where the abstraction _helps_ avoid confusion
-     whether it is "int" or "long".
-
-     u8/u16/u32 are perfectly fine typedefs, although they fit into
-     category (d) better than here.
-
-     NOTE! Again - there needs to be a _reason_ for this. If something is
-     "unsigned long", then there's no reason to do
-
-	typedef unsigned long myflags_t;
-
-     but if there is a clear reason for why it under certain circumstances
-     might be an "unsigned int" and under other configurations might be
-     "unsigned long", then by all means go ahead and use a typedef.
-
- (c) when you use sparse to literally create a _new_ type for
-     type-checking.
-
- (d) New types which are identical to standard C99 types, in certain
-     exceptional circumstances.
-
-     Although it would only take a short amount of time for the eyes and
-     brain to become accustomed to the standard types like 'uint32_t',
-     some people object to their use anyway.
-
-     Therefore, the Linux-specific 'u8/u16/u32/u64' types and their
-     signed equivalents which are identical to standard types are
-     permitted -- although they are not mandatory in new code of your
-     own.
-
-     When editing existing code which already uses one or the other set
-     of types, you should conform to the existing choices in that code.
-
- (e) Types safe for use in userspace.
-
-     In certain structures which are visible to userspace, we cannot
-     require C99 types and cannot use the 'u32' form above. Thus, we
-     use __u32 and similar types in all structures which are shared
-     with userspace.
-
-Maybe there are other cases too, but the rule should basically be to NEVER
-EVER use a typedef unless you can clearly match one of those rules.
-
-In general, a pointer, or a struct that has elements that can reasonably
-be directly accessed should _never_ be a typedef.
-
-
-		Chapter 6: Functions
-
-Functions should be short and sweet, and do just one thing.  They should
-fit on one or two screenfuls of text (the ISO/ANSI screen size is 80x24,
-as we all know), and do one thing and do that well.
-
-The maximum length of a function is inversely proportional to the
-complexity and indentation level of that function.  So, if you have a
-conceptually simple function that is just one long (but simple)
-case-statement, where you have to do lots of small things for a lot of
-different cases, it's OK to have a longer function.
-
-However, if you have a complex function, and you suspect that a
-less-than-gifted first-year high-school student might not even
-understand what the function is all about, you should adhere to the
-maximum limits all the more closely.  Use helper functions with
-descriptive names (you can ask the compiler to in-line them if you think
-it's performance-critical, and it will probably do a better job of it
-than you would have done).
-
-Another measure of the function is the number of local variables.  They
-shouldn't exceed 5-10, or you're doing something wrong.  Re-think the
-function, and split it into smaller pieces.  A human brain can
-generally easily keep track of about 7 different things, anything more
-and it gets confused.  You know you're brilliant, but maybe you'd like
-to understand what you did 2 weeks from now.
-
-In source files, separate functions with one blank line.  If the function is
-exported, the EXPORT* macro for it should follow immediately after the closing
-function brace line.  E.g.:
-
-int system_is_up(void)
-{
-	return system_state == SYSTEM_RUNNING;
-}
-EXPORT_SYMBOL(system_is_up);
-
-In function prototypes, include parameter names with their data types.
-Although this is not required by the C language, it is preferred in Linux
-because it is a simple way to add valuable information for the reader.
-
-
-		Chapter 7: Centralized exiting of functions
-
-Albeit deprecated by some people, the equivalent of the goto statement is
-used frequently by compilers in form of the unconditional jump instruction.
-
-The goto statement comes in handy when a function exits from multiple
-locations and some common work such as cleanup has to be done.
-
-The rationale is:
-
-- unconditional statements are easier to understand and follow
-- nesting is reduced
-- errors by not updating individual exit points when making
-    modifications are prevented
-- saves the compiler work to optimize redundant code away ;)
-
-int fun(int a)
-{
-	int result = 0;
-	char *buffer = kmalloc(SIZE);
-
-	if (buffer == NULL)
-		return -ENOMEM;
-
-	if (condition1) {
-		while (loop1) {
-			...
-		}
-		result = 1;
-		goto out;
-	}
-	...
-out:
-	kfree(buffer);
-	return result;
-}
-
-		Chapter 8: Commenting
-
-Comments are good, but there is also a danger of over-commenting.  NEVER
-try to explain HOW your code works in a comment: it's much better to
-write the code so that the _working_ is obvious, and it's a waste of
-time to explain badly written code.
-
-Generally, you want your comments to tell WHAT your code does, not HOW.
-Also, try to avoid putting comments inside a function body: if the
-function is so complex that you need to separately comment parts of it,
-you should probably go back to chapter 6 for a while.  You can make
-small comments to note or warn about something particularly clever (or
-ugly), but try to avoid excess.  Instead, put the comments at the head
-of the function, telling people what it does, and possibly WHY it does
-it.
-
-When commenting the kernel API functions, please use the kernel-doc format.
-See the files Documentation/kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt and scripts/kernel-doc
-for details.
-
-Linux style for comments is the C89 "/* ... */" style.
-Don't use C99-style "// ..." comments.
-
-The preferred style for long (multi-line) comments is:
-
-	/*
-	 * This is the preferred style for multi-line
-	 * comments in the Linux kernel source code.
-	 * Please use it consistently.
-	 *
-	 * Description:  A column of asterisks on the left side,
-	 * with beginning and ending almost-blank lines.
-	 */
-
-It's also important to comment data, whether they are basic types or derived
-types.  To this end, use just one data declaration per line (no commas for
-multiple data declarations).  This leaves you room for a small comment on each
-item, explaining its use.
-
-
-		Chapter 9: You've made a mess of it
-
-That's OK, we all do.  You've probably been told by your long-time Unix
-user helper that "GNU emacs" automatically formats the C sources for
-you, and you've noticed that yes, it does do that, but the defaults it
-uses are less than desirable (in fact, they are worse than random
-typing - an infinite number of monkeys typing into GNU emacs would never
-make a good program).
-
-So, you can either get rid of GNU emacs, or change it to use saner
-values.  To do the latter, you can stick the following in your .emacs file:
-
-(defun c-lineup-arglist-tabs-only (ignored)
-  "Line up argument lists by tabs, not spaces"
-  (let* ((anchor (c-langelem-pos c-syntactic-element))
-	 (column (c-langelem-2nd-pos c-syntactic-element))
-	 (offset (- (1+ column) anchor))
-	 (steps (floor offset c-basic-offset)))
-    (* (max steps 1)
-       c-basic-offset)))
-
-(add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook
-          (lambda ()
-            ;; Add kernel style
-            (c-add-style
-             "linux-tabs-only"
-             '("linux" (c-offsets-alist
-                        (arglist-cont-nonempty
-                         c-lineup-gcc-asm-reg
-                         c-lineup-arglist-tabs-only))))))
-
-(add-hook 'c-mode-hook
-          (lambda ()
-            (let ((filename (buffer-file-name)))
-              ;; Enable kernel mode for the appropriate files
-              (when (and filename
-                         (string-match (expand-file-name "~/src/linux-trees")
-                                       filename))
-                (setq indent-tabs-mode t)
-                (c-set-style "linux-tabs-only")))))
-
-This will make emacs go better with the kernel coding style for C
-files below ~/src/linux-trees.
-
-But even if you fail in getting emacs to do sane formatting, not
-everything is lost: use "indent".
-
-Now, again, GNU indent has the same brain-dead settings that GNU emacs
-has, which is why you need to give it a few command line options.
-However, that's not too bad, because even the makers of GNU indent
-recognize the authority of K&R (the GNU people aren't evil, they are
-just severely misguided in this matter), so you just give indent the
-options "-kr -i8" (stands for "K&R, 8 character indents"), or use
-"scripts/Lindent", which indents in the latest style.
-
-"indent" has a lot of options, and especially when it comes to comment
-re-formatting you may want to take a look at the man page.  But
-remember: "indent" is not a fix for bad programming.
-
-
-		Chapter 10: Kconfig configuration files
-
-For all of the Kconfig* configuration files throughout the source tree,
-the indentation is somewhat different.  Lines under a "config" definition
-are indented with one tab, while help text is indented an additional two
-spaces.  Example:
-
-config AUDIT
-	bool "Auditing support"
-	depends on NET
-	help
-	  Enable auditing infrastructure that can be used with another
-	  kernel subsystem, such as SELinux (which requires this for
-	  logging of avc messages output).  Does not do system-call
-	  auditing without CONFIG_AUDITSYSCALL.
-
-Features that might still be considered unstable should be defined as
-dependent on "EXPERIMENTAL":
-
-config SLUB
-	depends on EXPERIMENTAL && !ARCH_USES_SLAB_PAGE_STRUCT
-	bool "SLUB (Unqueued Allocator)"
-	...
-
-while seriously dangerous features (such as write support for certain
-filesystems) should advertise this prominently in their prompt string:
-
-config ADFS_FS_RW
-	bool "ADFS write support (DANGEROUS)"
-	depends on ADFS_FS
-	...
-
-For full documentation on the configuration files, see the file
-Documentation/kbuild/kconfig-language.txt.
-
-
-		Chapter 11: Data structures
-
-Data structures that have visibility outside the single-threaded
-environment they are created and destroyed in should always have
-reference counts.  In the kernel, garbage collection doesn't exist (and
-outside the kernel garbage collection is slow and inefficient), which
-means that you absolutely _have_ to reference count all your uses.
-
-Reference counting means that you can avoid locking, and allows multiple
-users to have access to the data structure in parallel - and not having
-to worry about the structure suddenly going away from under them just
-because they slept or did something else for a while.
-
-Note that locking is _not_ a replacement for reference counting.
-Locking is used to keep data structures coherent, while reference
-counting is a memory management technique.  Usually both are needed, and
-they are not to be confused with each other.
-
-Many data structures can indeed have two levels of reference counting,
-when there are users of different "classes".  The subclass count counts
-the number of subclass users, and decrements the global count just once
-when the subclass count goes to zero.
-
-Examples of this kind of "multi-level-reference-counting" can be found in
-memory management ("struct mm_struct": mm_users and mm_count), and in
-filesystem code ("struct super_block": s_count and s_active).
-
-Remember: if another thread can find your data structure, and you don't
-have a reference count on it, you almost certainly have a bug.
-
-
-		Chapter 12: Macros, Enums and RTL
-
-Names of macros defining constants and labels in enums are capitalized.
-
-#define CONSTANT 0x12345
-
-Enums are preferred when defining several related constants.
-
-CAPITALIZED macro names are appreciated but macros resembling functions
-may be named in lower case.
-
-Generally, inline functions are preferable to macros resembling functions.
-
-Macros with multiple statements should be enclosed in a do - while block:
-
-#define macrofun(a, b, c) 			\
-	do {					\
-		if (a == 5)			\
-			do_this(b, c);		\
-	} while (0)
-
-Things to avoid when using macros:
-
-1) macros that affect control flow:
-
-#define FOO(x)					\
-	do {					\
-		if (blah(x) < 0)		\
-			return -EBUGGERED;	\
-	} while(0)
-
-is a _very_ bad idea.  It looks like a function call but exits the "calling"
-function; don't break the internal parsers of those who will read the code.
-
-2) macros that depend on having a local variable with a magic name:
-
-#define FOO(val) bar(index, val)
-
-might look like a good thing, but it's confusing as hell when one reads the
-code and it's prone to breakage from seemingly innocent changes.
-
-3) macros with arguments that are used as l-values: FOO(x) = y; will
-bite you if somebody e.g. turns FOO into an inline function.
-
-4) forgetting about precedence: macros defining constants using expressions
-must enclose the expression in parentheses. Beware of similar issues with
-macros using parameters.
-
-#define CONSTANT 0x4000
-#define CONSTEXP (CONSTANT | 3)
-
-The cpp manual deals with macros exhaustively. The gcc internals manual also
-covers RTL which is used frequently with assembly language in the kernel.
-
-
-		Chapter 13: Printing kernel messages
-
-Kernel developers like to be seen as literate. Do mind the spelling
-of kernel messages to make a good impression. Do not use crippled
-words like "dont"; use "do not" or "don't" instead.  Make the messages
-concise, clear, and unambiguous.
-
-Kernel messages do not have to be terminated with a period.
-
-Printing numbers in parentheses (%d) adds no value and should be avoided.
-
-There are a number of driver model diagnostic macros in <linux/device.h>
-which you should use to make sure messages are matched to the right device
-and driver, and are tagged with the right level:  dev_err(), dev_warn(),
-dev_info(), and so forth.  For messages that aren't associated with a
-particular device, <linux/kernel.h> defines pr_debug() and pr_info().
-
-Coming up with good debugging messages can be quite a challenge; and once
-you have them, they can be a huge help for remote troubleshooting.  Such
-messages should be compiled out when the DEBUG symbol is not defined (that
-is, by default they are not included).  When you use dev_dbg() or pr_debug(),
-that's automatic.  Many subsystems have Kconfig options to turn on -DDEBUG.
-A related convention uses VERBOSE_DEBUG to add dev_vdbg() messages to the
-ones already enabled by DEBUG.
-
-
-		Chapter 14: Allocating memory
-
-The kernel provides the following general purpose memory allocators:
-kmalloc(), kzalloc(), kcalloc(), and vmalloc().  Please refer to the API
-documentation for further information about them.
-
-The preferred form for passing a size of a struct is the following:
-
-	p = kmalloc(sizeof(*p), ...);
-
-The alternative form where struct name is spelled out hurts readability and
-introduces an opportunity for a bug when the pointer variable type is changed
-but the corresponding sizeof that is passed to a memory allocator is not.
-
-Casting the return value which is a void pointer is redundant. The conversion
-from void pointer to any other pointer type is guaranteed by the C programming
-language.
-
-
-		Chapter 15: The inline disease
-
-There appears to be a common misperception that gcc has a magic "make me
-faster" speedup option called "inline". While the use of inlines can be
-appropriate (for example as a means of replacing macros, see Chapter 12), it
-very often is not. Abundant use of the inline keyword leads to a much bigger
-kernel, which in turn slows the system as a whole down, due to a bigger
-icache footprint for the CPU and simply because there is less memory
-available for the pagecache. Just think about it; a pagecache miss causes a
-disk seek, which easily takes 5 miliseconds. There are a LOT of cpu cycles
-that can go into these 5 miliseconds.
-
-A reasonable rule of thumb is to not put inline at functions that have more
-than 3 lines of code in them. An exception to this rule are the cases where
-a parameter is known to be a compiletime constant, and as a result of this
-constantness you *know* the compiler will be able to optimize most of your
-function away at compile time. For a good example of this later case, see
-the kmalloc() inline function.
-
-Often people argue that adding inline to functions that are static and used
-only once is always a win since there is no space tradeoff. While this is
-technically correct, gcc is capable of inlining these automatically without
-help, and the maintenance issue of removing the inline when a second user
-appears outweighs the potential value of the hint that tells gcc to do
-something it would have done anyway.
-
-
-		Chapter 16: Function return values and names
-
-Functions can return values of many different kinds, and one of the
-most common is a value indicating whether the function succeeded or
-failed.  Such a value can be represented as an error-code integer
-(-Exxx = failure, 0 = success) or a "succeeded" boolean (0 = failure,
-non-zero = success).
-
-Mixing up these two sorts of representations is a fertile source of
-difficult-to-find bugs.  If the C language included a strong distinction
-between integers and booleans then the compiler would find these mistakes
-for us... but it doesn't.  To help prevent such bugs, always follow this
-convention:
-
-	If the name of a function is an action or an imperative command,
-	the function should return an error-code integer.  If the name
-	is a predicate, the function should return a "succeeded" boolean.
-
-For example, "add work" is a command, and the add_work() function returns 0
-for success or -EBUSY for failure.  In the same way, "PCI device present" is
-a predicate, and the pci_dev_present() function returns 1 if it succeeds in
-finding a matching device or 0 if it doesn't.
-
-All EXPORTed functions must respect this convention, and so should all
-public functions.  Private (static) functions need not, but it is
-recommended that they do.
-
-Functions whose return value is the actual result of a computation, rather
-than an indication of whether the computation succeeded, are not subject to
-this rule.  Generally they indicate failure by returning some out-of-range
-result.  Typical examples would be functions that return pointers; they use
-NULL or the ERR_PTR mechanism to report failure.
-
-
-		Chapter 17:  Don't re-invent the kernel macros
-
-The header file include/linux/kernel.h contains a number of macros that
-you should use, rather than explicitly coding some variant of them yourself.
-For example, if you need to calculate the length of an array, take advantage
-of the macro
-
-  #define ARRAY_SIZE(x) (sizeof(x) / sizeof((x)[0]))
-
-Similarly, if you need to calculate the size of some structure member, use
-
-  #define FIELD_SIZEOF(t, f) (sizeof(((t*)0)->f))
-
-There are also min() and max() macros that do strict type checking if you
-need them.  Feel free to peruse that header file to see what else is already
-defined that you shouldn't reproduce in your code.
-
-
-		Chapter 18:  Editor modelines and other cruft
-
-Some editors can interpret configuration information embedded in source files,
-indicated with special markers.  For example, emacs interprets lines marked
-like this:
-
--*- mode: c -*-
-
-Or like this:
-
-/*
-Local Variables:
-compile-command: "gcc -DMAGIC_DEBUG_FLAG foo.c"
-End:
-*/
-
-Vim interprets markers that look like this:
-
-/* vim:set sw=8 noet */
-
-Do not include any of these in source files.  People have their own personal
-editor configurations, and your source files should not override them.  This
-includes markers for indentation and mode configuration.  People may use their
-own custom mode, or may have some other magic method for making indentation
-work correctly.
-
-
-
-		Appendix I: References
-
-The C Programming Language, Second Edition
-by Brian W. Kernighan and Dennis M. Ritchie.
-Prentice Hall, Inc., 1988.
-ISBN 0-13-110362-8 (paperback), 0-13-110370-9 (hardback).
-URL: http://cm.bell-labs.com/cm/cs/cbook/
-
-The Practice of Programming
-by Brian W. Kernighan and Rob Pike.
-Addison-Wesley, Inc., 1999.
-ISBN 0-201-61586-X.
-URL: http://cm.bell-labs.com/cm/cs/tpop/
-
-GNU manuals - where in compliance with K&R and this text - for cpp, gcc,
-gcc internals and indent, all available from http://www.gnu.org/manual/
-
-WG14 is the international standardization working group for the programming
-language C, URL: http://www.open-std.org/JTC1/SC22/WG14/
-
-Kernel CodingStyle, by greg@kroah.com at OLS 2002:
-http://www.kroah.com/linux/talks/ols_2002_kernel_codingstyle_talk/html/
-
---
-Last updated on 2007-July-13.
-

config/release/3rdparty/syslinux/doc/SubmittingPatches.txt

@@ -1,568 +0,0 @@
-I don't have specific submission guidelines for Syslinux, but the ones
-that appropriate to the Linux kernel are certainly good enough for
-Syslinux.
-
-In particular, however, I appreciate if patches sent follow the
-standard Linux submission format, as I can automatically import them
-into git, retaining description and author information.  Thus, this
-file from the Linux kernel might be useful.
-
-
-    -----------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-
-	How to Get Your Change Into the Linux Kernel
-		or
-	Care And Operation Of Your Linus Torvalds
-
-
-
-For a person or company who wishes to submit a change to the Linux
-kernel, the process can sometimes be daunting if you're not familiar
-with "the system."  This text is a collection of suggestions which
-can greatly increase the chances of your change being accepted.
-
-Read Documentation/SubmitChecklist for a list of items to check
-before submitting code.  If you are submitting a driver, also read
-Documentation/SubmittingDrivers.
-
-
-
---------------------------------------------
-SECTION 1 - CREATING AND SENDING YOUR CHANGE
---------------------------------------------
-
-
-
-1) "diff -up"
-------------
-
-Use "diff -up" or "diff -uprN" to create patches.
-
-All changes to the Linux kernel occur in the form of patches, as
-generated by diff(1).  When creating your patch, make sure to create it
-in "unified diff" format, as supplied by the '-u' argument to diff(1).
-Also, please use the '-p' argument which shows which C function each
-change is in - that makes the resultant diff a lot easier to read.
-Patches should be based in the root kernel source directory,
-not in any lower subdirectory.
-
-To create a patch for a single file, it is often sufficient to do:
-
-	SRCTREE= linux-2.6
-	MYFILE=  drivers/net/mydriver.c
-
-	cd $SRCTREE
-	cp $MYFILE $MYFILE.orig
-	vi $MYFILE	# make your change
-	cd ..
-	diff -up $SRCTREE/$MYFILE{.orig,} > /tmp/patch
-
-To create a patch for multiple files, you should unpack a "vanilla",
-or unmodified kernel source tree, and generate a diff against your
-own source tree.  For example:
-
-	MYSRC= /devel/linux-2.6
-
-	tar xvfz linux-2.6.12.tar.gz
-	mv linux-2.6.12 linux-2.6.12-vanilla
-	diff -uprN -X linux-2.6.12-vanilla/Documentation/dontdiff \
-		linux-2.6.12-vanilla $MYSRC > /tmp/patch
-
-"dontdiff" is a list of files which are generated by the kernel during
-the build process, and should be ignored in any diff(1)-generated
-patch.  The "dontdiff" file is included in the kernel tree in
-2.6.12 and later.  For earlier kernel versions, you can get it
-from <http://www.xenotime.net/linux/doc/dontdiff>.
-
-Make sure your patch does not include any extra files which do not
-belong in a patch submission.  Make sure to review your patch -after-
-generated it with diff(1), to ensure accuracy.
-
-If your changes produce a lot of deltas, you may want to look into
-splitting them into individual patches which modify things in
-logical stages.  This will facilitate easier reviewing by other
-kernel developers, very important if you want your patch accepted.
-There are a number of scripts which can aid in this:
-
-Quilt:
-http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/quilt
-
-Andrew Morton's patch scripts:
-http://www.zip.com.au/~akpm/linux/patches/
-Instead of these scripts, quilt is the recommended patch management
-tool (see above).
-
-
-
-2) Describe your changes.
-
-Describe the technical detail of the change(s) your patch includes.
-
-Be as specific as possible.  The WORST descriptions possible include
-things like "update driver X", "bug fix for driver X", or "this patch
-includes updates for subsystem X.  Please apply."
-
-If your description starts to get long, that's a sign that you probably
-need to split up your patch.  See #3, next.
-
-
-
-3) Separate your changes.
-
-Separate _logical changes_ into a single patch file.
-
-For example, if your changes include both bug fixes and performance
-enhancements for a single driver, separate those changes into two
-or more patches.  If your changes include an API update, and a new
-driver which uses that new API, separate those into two patches.
-
-On the other hand, if you make a single change to numerous files,
-group those changes into a single patch.  Thus a single logical change
-is contained within a single patch.
-
-If one patch depends on another patch in order for a change to be
-complete, that is OK.  Simply note "this patch depends on patch X"
-in your patch description.
-
-If you cannot condense your patch set into a smaller set of patches,
-then only post say 15 or so at a time and wait for review and integration.
-
-
-
-4) Style check your changes.
-
-Check your patch for basic style violations, details of which can be
-found in Documentation/CodingStyle.  Failure to do so simply wastes
-the reviewers time and will get your patch rejected, probably
-without even being read.
-
-At a minimum you should check your patches with the patch style
-checker prior to submission (scripts/checkpatch.pl).  You should
-be able to justify all violations that remain in your patch.
-
-
-
-5) Select e-mail destination.
-
-Look through the MAINTAINERS file and the source code, and determine
-if your change applies to a specific subsystem of the kernel, with
-an assigned maintainer.  If so, e-mail that person.
-
-If no maintainer is listed, or the maintainer does not respond, send
-your patch to the primary Linux kernel developer's mailing list,
-linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org.  Most kernel developers monitor this
-e-mail list, and can comment on your changes.
-
-
-Do not send more than 15 patches at once to the vger mailing lists!!!
-
-
-Linus Torvalds is the final arbiter of all changes accepted into the
-Linux kernel.  His e-mail address is <torvalds@linux-foundation.org>.
-He gets a lot of e-mail, so typically you should do your best to -avoid-
-sending him e-mail.
-
-Patches which are bug fixes, are "obvious" changes, or similarly
-require little discussion should be sent or CC'd to Linus.  Patches
-which require discussion or do not have a clear advantage should
-usually be sent first to linux-kernel.  Only after the patch is
-discussed should the patch then be submitted to Linus.
-
-
-
-6) Select your CC (e-mail carbon copy) list.
-
-Unless you have a reason NOT to do so, CC linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org.
-
-Other kernel developers besides Linus need to be aware of your change,
-so that they may comment on it and offer code review and suggestions.
-linux-kernel is the primary Linux kernel developer mailing list.
-Other mailing lists are available for specific subsystems, such as
-USB, framebuffer devices, the VFS, the SCSI subsystem, etc.  See the
-MAINTAINERS file for a mailing list that relates specifically to
-your change.
-
-Majordomo lists of VGER.KERNEL.ORG at:
-	<http://vger.kernel.org/vger-lists.html>
-
-If changes affect userland-kernel interfaces, please send
-the MAN-PAGES maintainer (as listed in the MAINTAINERS file)
-a man-pages patch, or at least a notification of the change,
-so that some information makes its way into the manual pages.
-
-Even if the maintainer did not respond in step #4, make sure to ALWAYS
-copy the maintainer when you change their code.
-
-For small patches you may want to CC the Trivial Patch Monkey
-trivial@kernel.org managed by Adrian Bunk; which collects "trivial"
-patches. Trivial patches must qualify for one of the following rules:
- Spelling fixes in documentation
- Spelling fixes which could break grep(1)
- Warning fixes (cluttering with useless warnings is bad)
- Compilation fixes (only if they are actually correct)
- Runtime fixes (only if they actually fix things)
- Removing use of deprecated functions/macros (eg. check_region)
- Contact detail and documentation fixes
- Non-portable code replaced by portable code (even in arch-specific,
- since people copy, as long as it's trivial)
- Any fix by the author/maintainer of the file (ie. patch monkey
- in re-transmission mode)
-URL: <http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/bunk/trivial/>
-
-
-
-7) No MIME, no links, no compression, no attachments.  Just plain text.
-
-Linus and other kernel developers need to be able to read and comment
-on the changes you are submitting.  It is important for a kernel
-developer to be able to "quote" your changes, using standard e-mail
-tools, so that they may comment on specific portions of your code.
-
-For this reason, all patches should be submitting e-mail "inline".
-WARNING:  Be wary of your editor's word-wrap corrupting your patch,
-if you choose to cut-n-paste your patch.
-
-Do not attach the patch as a MIME attachment, compressed or not.
-Many popular e-mail applications will not always transmit a MIME
-attachment as plain text, making it impossible to comment on your
-code.  A MIME attachment also takes Linus a bit more time to process,
-decreasing the likelihood of your MIME-attached change being accepted.
-
-Exception:  If your mailer is mangling patches then someone may ask
-you to re-send them using MIME.
-
-See Documentation/email-clients.txt for hints about configuring
-your e-mail client so that it sends your patches untouched.
-
-8) E-mail size.
-
-When sending patches to Linus, always follow step #7.
-
-Large changes are not appropriate for mailing lists, and some
-maintainers.  If your patch, uncompressed, exceeds 40 kB in size,
-it is preferred that you store your patch on an Internet-accessible
-server, and provide instead a URL (link) pointing to your patch.
-
-
-
-9) Name your kernel version.
-
-It is important to note, either in the subject line or in the patch
-description, the kernel version to which this patch applies.
-
-If the patch does not apply cleanly to the latest kernel version,
-Linus will not apply it.
-
-
-
-10) Don't get discouraged.  Re-submit.
-
-After you have submitted your change, be patient and wait.  If Linus
-likes your change and applies it, it will appear in the next version
-of the kernel that he releases.
-
-However, if your change doesn't appear in the next version of the
-kernel, there could be any number of reasons.  It's YOUR job to
-narrow down those reasons, correct what was wrong, and submit your
-updated change.
-
-It is quite common for Linus to "drop" your patch without comment.
-That's the nature of the system.  If he drops your patch, it could be
-due to
-* Your patch did not apply cleanly to the latest kernel version.
-* Your patch was not sufficiently discussed on linux-kernel.
-* A style issue (see section 2).
-* An e-mail formatting issue (re-read this section).
-* A technical problem with your change.
-* He gets tons of e-mail, and yours got lost in the shuffle.
-* You are being annoying.
-
-When in doubt, solicit comments on linux-kernel mailing list.
-
-
-
-11) Include PATCH in the subject
-
-Due to high e-mail traffic to Linus, and to linux-kernel, it is common
-convention to prefix your subject line with [PATCH].  This lets Linus
-and other kernel developers more easily distinguish patches from other
-e-mail discussions.
-
-
-
-12) Sign your work
-
-To improve tracking of who did what, especially with patches that can
-percolate to their final resting place in the kernel through several
-layers of maintainers, we've introduced a "sign-off" procedure on
-patches that are being emailed around.
-
-The sign-off is a simple line at the end of the explanation for the
-patch, which certifies that you wrote it or otherwise have the right to
-pass it on as a open-source patch.  The rules are pretty simple: if you
-can certify the below:
-
-        Developer's Certificate of Origin 1.1
-
-        By making a contribution to this project, I certify that:
-
-        (a) The contribution was created in whole or in part by me and I
-            have the right to submit it under the open source license
-            indicated in the file; or
-
-        (b) The contribution is based upon previous work that, to the best
-            of my knowledge, is covered under an appropriate open source
-            license and I have the right under that license to submit that
-            work with modifications, whether created in whole or in part
-            by me, under the same open source license (unless I am
-            permitted to submit under a different license), as indicated
-            in the file; or
-
-        (c) The contribution was provided directly to me by some other
-            person who certified (a), (b) or (c) and I have not modified
-            it.
-
-	(d) I understand and agree that this project and the contribution
-	    are public and that a record of the contribution (including all
-	    personal information I submit with it, including my sign-off) is
-	    maintained indefinitely and may be redistributed consistent with
-	    this project or the open source license(s) involved.
-
-then you just add a line saying
-
-	Signed-off-by: Random J Developer <random@developer.example.org>
-
-using your real name (sorry, no pseudonyms or anonymous contributions.)
-
-Some people also put extra tags at the end.  They'll just be ignored for
-now, but you can do this to mark internal company procedures or just
-point out some special detail about the sign-off.
-
-
-13) When to use Acked-by:
-
-The Signed-off-by: tag indicates that the signer was involved in the
-development of the patch, or that he/she was in the patch's delivery path.
-
-If a person was not directly involved in the preparation or handling of a
-patch but wishes to signify and record their approval of it then they can
-arrange to have an Acked-by: line added to the patch's changelog.
-
-Acked-by: is often used by the maintainer of the affected code when that
-maintainer neither contributed to nor forwarded the patch.
-
-Acked-by: is not as formal as Signed-off-by:.  It is a record that the acker
-has at least reviewed the patch and has indicated acceptance.  Hence patch
-mergers will sometimes manually convert an acker's "yep, looks good to me"
-into an Acked-by:.
-
-Acked-by: does not necessarily indicate acknowledgement of the entire patch.
-For example, if a patch affects multiple subsystems and has an Acked-by: from
-one subsystem maintainer then this usually indicates acknowledgement of just
-the part which affects that maintainer's code.  Judgement should be used here.
- When in doubt people should refer to the original discussion in the mailing
-list archives.
-
-
-14) The canonical patch format
-
-The canonical patch subject line is:
-
-    Subject: [PATCH 001/123] subsystem: summary phrase
-
-The canonical patch message body contains the following:
-
-  - A "from" line specifying the patch author.
-
-  - An empty line.
-
-  - The body of the explanation, which will be copied to the
-    permanent changelog to describe this patch.
-
-  - The "Signed-off-by:" lines, described above, which will
-    also go in the changelog.
-
-  - A marker line containing simply "---".
-
-  - Any additional comments not suitable for the changelog.
-
-  - The actual patch (diff output).
-
-The Subject line format makes it very easy to sort the emails
-alphabetically by subject line - pretty much any email reader will
-support that - since because the sequence number is zero-padded,
-the numerical and alphabetic sort is the same.
-
-The "subsystem" in the email's Subject should identify which
-area or subsystem of the kernel is being patched.
-
-The "summary phrase" in the email's Subject should concisely
-describe the patch which that email contains.  The "summary
-phrase" should not be a filename.  Do not use the same "summary
-phrase" for every patch in a whole patch series (where a "patch
-series" is an ordered sequence of multiple, related patches).
-
-Bear in mind that the "summary phrase" of your email becomes
-a globally-unique identifier for that patch.  It propagates
-all the way into the git changelog.  The "summary phrase" may
-later be used in developer discussions which refer to the patch.
-People will want to google for the "summary phrase" to read
-discussion regarding that patch.
-
-A couple of example Subjects:
-
-    Subject: [patch 2/5] ext2: improve scalability of bitmap searching
-    Subject: [PATCHv2 001/207] x86: fix eflags tracking
-
-The "from" line must be the very first line in the message body,
-and has the form:
-
-        From: Original Author <author@example.com>
-
-The "from" line specifies who will be credited as the author of the
-patch in the permanent changelog.  If the "from" line is missing,
-then the "From:" line from the email header will be used to determine
-the patch author in the changelog.
-
-The explanation body will be committed to the permanent source
-changelog, so should make sense to a competent reader who has long
-since forgotten the immediate details of the discussion that might
-have led to this patch.
-
-The "---" marker line serves the essential purpose of marking for patch
-handling tools where the changelog message ends.
-
-One good use for the additional comments after the "---" marker is for
-a diffstat, to show what files have changed, and the number of inserted
-and deleted lines per file.  A diffstat is especially useful on bigger
-patches.  Other comments relevant only to the moment or the maintainer,
-not suitable for the permanent changelog, should also go here.
-Use diffstat options "-p 1 -w 70" so that filenames are listed from the
-top of the kernel source tree and don't use too much horizontal space
-(easily fit in 80 columns, maybe with some indentation).
-
-See more details on the proper patch format in the following
-references.
-
-
-
-
------------------------------------
-SECTION 2 - HINTS, TIPS, AND TRICKS
------------------------------------
-
-This section lists many of the common "rules" associated with code
-submitted to the kernel.  There are always exceptions... but you must
-have a really good reason for doing so.  You could probably call this
-section Linus Computer Science 101.
-
-
-
-1) Read Documentation/CodingStyle
-
-Nuff said.  If your code deviates too much from this, it is likely
-to be rejected without further review, and without comment.
-
-One significant exception is when moving code from one file to
-another -- in this case you should not modify the moved code at all in
-the same patch which moves it.  This clearly delineates the act of
-moving the code and your changes.  This greatly aids review of the
-actual differences and allows tools to better track the history of
-the code itself.
-
-Check your patches with the patch style checker prior to submission
-(scripts/checkpatch.pl).  The style checker should be viewed as
-a guide not as the final word.  If your code looks better with
-a violation then its probably best left alone.
-
-The checker reports at three levels:
- - ERROR: things that are very likely to be wrong
- - WARNING: things requiring careful review
- - CHECK: things requiring thought
-
-You should be able to justify all violations that remain in your
-patch.
-
-
-
-2) #ifdefs are ugly
-
-Code cluttered with ifdefs is difficult to read and maintain.  Don't do
-it.  Instead, put your ifdefs in a header, and conditionally define
-'static inline' functions, or macros, which are used in the code.
-Let the compiler optimize away the "no-op" case.
-
-Simple example, of poor code:
-
-	dev = alloc_etherdev (sizeof(struct funky_private));
-	if (!dev)
-		return -ENODEV;
-	#ifdef CONFIG_NET_FUNKINESS
-	init_funky_net(dev);
-	#endif
-
-Cleaned-up example:
-
-(in header)
-	#ifndef CONFIG_NET_FUNKINESS
-	static inline void init_funky_net (struct net_device *d) {}
-	#endif
-
-(in the code itself)
-	dev = alloc_etherdev (sizeof(struct funky_private));
-	if (!dev)
-		return -ENODEV;
-	init_funky_net(dev);
-
-
-
-3) 'static inline' is better than a macro
-
-Static inline functions are greatly preferred over macros.
-They provide type safety, have no length limitations, no formatting
-limitations, and under gcc they are as cheap as macros.
-
-Macros should only be used for cases where a static inline is clearly
-suboptimal [there a few, isolated cases of this in fast paths],
-or where it is impossible to use a static inline function [such as
-string-izing].
-
-'static inline' is preferred over 'static __inline__', 'extern inline',
-and 'extern __inline__'.
-
-
-
-4) Don't over-design.
-
-Don't try to anticipate nebulous future cases which may or may not
-be useful:  "Make it as simple as you can, and no simpler."
-
-
-
-----------------------
-SECTION 3 - REFERENCES
-----------------------
-
-Andrew Morton, "The perfect patch" (tpp).
-  <http://www.zip.com.au/~akpm/linux/patches/stuff/tpp.txt>
-
-Jeff Garzik, "Linux kernel patch submission format".
-  <http://linux.yyz.us/patch-format.html>
-
-Greg Kroah-Hartman, "How to piss off a kernel subsystem maintainer".
-  <http://www.kroah.com/log/2005/03/31/>
-  <http://www.kroah.com/log/2005/07/08/>
-  <http://www.kroah.com/log/2005/10/19/>
-  <http://www.kroah.com/log/2006/01/11/>
-
-NO!!!! No more huge patch bombs to linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org people!
-  <http://marc.theaimsgroup.com/?l=linux-kernel&m=112112749912944&w=2>
-
-Kernel Documentation/CodingStyle:
-  <http://users.sosdg.org/~qiyong/lxr/source/Documentation/CodingStyle>
-
-Linus Torvalds's mail on the canonical patch format:
-  <http://lkml.org/lkml/2005/4/7/183>
---

config/release/3rdparty/syslinux/doc/distrib.txt

@@ -1,29 +0,0 @@
-For creators of Linux distributions:
-
-Syslinux is a notoriously hard program to debug, since it runs outside
-of any operating system, and has a tendency to expose BIOS and
-hardware bugs on various systems.  Therefore, I would appreciate if
-you would resist the temptation of recompiling the Syslinux bootloader
-itself (ldlinux.asm) if at all possible.  If you do that, I will have
-to refer any bug reports I receive back to the respective distributor.
-
-However, I have no such concerns about recompiling the installer
-programs, and in fact, with both libc 5 and libc 6 in common use in
-the Linux world today I understand if you wish to relink the
-Linux-based installer against your system version of libc.  Therefore
-a special makefile targets "make installer" has been included with the
-Syslinux distribution, starting with version 1.42.
-
-To rebuild the installer programs *only*, starting from a freshly
-untarred distribution copy of Syslinux, do:
-
-	make clean
-	make installer
-
-If you want to remove all intermediate files, including the ones
-obtained from assembling ldlinux.asm and which are included in the
-distribution, do "make spotless".
-
-I appreciate your assistance in this matter.
-
-	H. Peter Anvin

config/release/3rdparty/syslinux/doc/extlinux.txt

@@ -1,134 +0,0 @@
-EXTLINUX is a new Syslinux derivative, which boots from a Linux
-ext2/ext3 filesystem.
-
-It works the same way as SYSLINUX (see doc/syslinux.txt), with a few
-slight modifications.
-
-1. The installer is run on a *mounted* filesystem.  Run the extlinux
-   installer on the directory in which you want extlinux installed:
-
-	extlinux --install /boot
-
-   Specify --install (-i) to install for the first time, or
-   --update (-U) to upgrade a previous installation.
-
-   NOTE: this doesn't have to be the root directory of a filesystem.
-   If /boot is a filesystem, you can do:
-
-	mkdir -p /boot/extlinux
-	extlinux --install /boot/extlinux
-
-   ... to create a subdirectory and install extlinux in it.
-   /boot/extlinux is the recommended location for extlinux.
-
-
-2. The configuration file is called "extlinux.conf", and is expected
-   to be found in the same directory as extlinux is installed in.
-   Since 4.00 "syslinux.cfg" is also tried if "extlinux.conf" is not
-   found.
-
-
-3. Pathnames can be absolute or relative; if absolute (with a leading
-   slash), they are relative to the root of the filesystem on which
-   extlinux is installed (/boot in the example above), if relative,
-   they are relative to the extlinux directory.
-
-   extlinux supports subdirectories, but the total path length is
-   limited to 511 characters.
-
-
-4. EXTLINUX now supports symbolic links.  However, extremely long
-   symbolic links might hit the pathname limit.  Also, please note
-   that absolute symbolic links are interpreted from the root *of the
-   filesystem*, which might be different from how the running system
-   would interpret it (e.g. in the case of a separate /boot
-   partition.)  Therefore, use relative symbolic links if at all
-   possible.
-
-
-5. EXTLINUX now has "boot-once" support.  The boot-once information is
-   stored in an on-disk datastructure, part of extlinux.sys, called
-   the "Auxillary Data Vector".  The Auxilliary Data Vector is also
-   available to COMBOOT/COM32 modules that want to store small amounts
-   of information.
-
-   To set the boot-once information, do:
-
-	extlinux --once 'command' /boot/extlinux
-
-   where 'command' is any command you could enter at the Syslinux
-   command line.  It will be executed on the next boot and then
-   erased.
-
-   To clear the boot-once information, do:
-
-	extlinux --clear-once /boot/extlinux
-
-   If EXTLINUX is used on a RAID-1, this is recommended, since under
-   certain circumstances a RAID-1 rebuild can "resurrect" the
-   boot-once information otherwise.
-
-   To clear the entire Auxillary Data Vector, do:
-
-	extlinux --reset-adv /boot/extlinux
-
-   This will erase all data stored in the ADV, including boot-once.
-
-   The --once, --clear-once, and --reset-adv commands can be combined
-   with --install or --update, if desired.  The ADV is preserved
-   across updates, unless --reset-adv is specified.
-
-
-Note that EXTLINUX installs in the filesystem partition like a
-well-behaved bootloader :)  Thus, it needs a master boot record in the
-partition table; the mbr.bin shipped with Syslinux should work well.
-To install it just do:
-
-	cat mbr.bin > /dev/XXX
-
-... where /dev/XXX is the appropriate master device, e.g. /dev/hda,
-and make sure the correct partition in set active.
-
-
-If you have multiple disks in a software RAID configuration, the
-preferred way to boot is:
-
-- Create a separate RAID-1 partition for /boot.  Note that the Linux
-  RAID-1 driver can span as many disks as you wish.
-
-- Install the MBR on *each disk*, and mark the RAID-1 partition
-  active.
-
-- Run "extlinux --raid --install /boot" to install extlinux.  This
-  will install it on all the drives in the RAID-1 set, which means
-  you can boot any combination of drives in any order.
-
-
-
-It is not required to re-run the extlinux installer after installing
-new kernels.  If you are using ext3 journalling, however, it might be
-desirable to do so, since running the extlinux installer will flush
-the log.  Otherwise a dirty shutdown could cause some of the new
-kernel image to still be in the log.  This is a general problem for
-boot loaders on journalling filesystems; it is not specific to
-extlinux.  The "sync" command does not flush the log on the ext3
-filesystem.
-
-
-The Syslinux Project boot loaders support chain loading other
-operating systems via a separate module, chain.c32 (located in
-com32/modules/chain.c32).  To use it, specify a LABEL in the
-configuration file with KERNEL chain.c32 and APPEND [hd|fd]<number>
-[<partition>]
-
-For example:
-
-# Windows CE/ME/NT, a very dense operating system.
-# Second partition (2) on the first hard disk (hd0);
-# Linux would *typically* call this /dev/hda2 or /dev/sda2.
-LABEL cement
-	KERNEL chain.c32
-	APPEND hd0 2
-
-See also doc/menu.txt.
-

config/release/3rdparty/syslinux/doc/gpt.txt

@@ -1,69 +0,0 @@
-			  GPT boot protocol
-
-There are two ways to boot a GPT-formatted disk on a BIOS system.
-Hybrid booting, and the new GPT-only booting protocol originally
-proposed by the author, and later adopted by the T13 committee in
-slightly modified form.
-
-
-	*** Hybrid booting ***
-
-Hybrid booting uses a standard MBR, and has bootable ("active")
-partitions present, as partitions, in the GPT PMBR sector.  This means
-the PMBR, instead of containing only one "protective" partition (type
-EE), may contain up to three partitions: a protective partition (EE)
-*before* the active partition, the active partition, and a protective
-partition (EE) *after* the active partition.  The active partition is
-limited to the first 2^32 sectors (2 TB) of the disk.
-
-All partitions, including the active partition, should have GPT
-partition entries.  Thus, changing which partition is active does NOT
-change the GPT partition table.
-
-This is the only known way to boot Microsoft operating systems from a
-GPT disk with BIOS firmware.
-
-
-	*** New protocol ***
-
-This defines the T13-approved protocol for GPT partitions with BIOS
-firmware.  It maintains backwards compatibility to the extent
-possible.  It is implemented by the file mbr/gptmbr.bin.
-
-The (P)MBR format is the normal PMBR specified in the UEFI
-documentation, with the first 440 bytes used for the boot code.  The
-partition to be booted is marked by setting bit 2 in the GPT Partition
-Entry Attributes field (offset 48); this bit is reserved by the UEFI
-Forum for "Legacy BIOS Bootable".
-
-
-    -> The handover protocol
-
-The PMBR boot code loads the first sector of the bootable partition,
-and passes in DL=<disk number>, ES:DI=<pointer to $PnP>, sets EAX to
-0x54504721 ("!GPT") and points DS:SI to a structure of the following
-form:
-
-	Offset	Size	Contents
-	---------------------------------------------------------
-	  0	  1	0x80 (this is a bootable partition)
-	  1	  3	CHS of partition (using INT 13h geometry)
-	  4	  1	0xED (partition type: synthetic)
-	  5	  3	CHS of partition end
-	  8	  4	Partition start LBA
-	 12	  4	Partition end LBA
-	 16	  4	Length of the GPT entry
-	 20	varies	GPT partition entry
-
-The CHS information is optional; gptmbr.bin currently does *NOT*
-calculate them, and just leaves them as zero.
-
-Bytes 0-15 matches the standard MBR handover (DS:SI points to the
-partition entry), except that the information is provided
-synthetically.  The MBR-compatible fields are directly usable if they
-are < 2 TB, otherwise these fields should contain 0xFFFFFFFF and the
-OS will need to understand the GPT partition entry which follows the
-MBR one.  The "!GPT" magic number in EAX and the 0xED partition type
-also informs the OS that the GPT partition information is present.
-
-Syslinux 4.00 and later fully implements this protocol.

config/release/3rdparty/syslinux/doc/isolinux.txt

@@ -1,133 +0,0 @@
-                               ISOLINUX
-
-       A bootloader for Linux using ISO 9660/El Torito CD-ROMs
-
-       Copyright 1994-2008 H. Peter Anvin - All Rights Reserved
-
-This program is provided under the terms of the GNU General Public
-License, version 2 or, at your option, any later version.  There is no
-warranty, neither expressed nor implied, to the function of this
-program.  Please see the included file COPYING for details.
-
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-ISOLINUX is a boot loader for Linux/i386 that operates off ISO 9660/El
-Torito CD-ROMs in "no emulation" mode.  This avoids the need to create
-an "emulation disk image" with limited space (for "floppy emulation")
-or compatibility problems (for "hard disk emulation".)
-
-This documentation isn't here yet, but here is enough that you should
-be able to test it out:
-
-Make sure you have a recent enough version of mkisofs.  I recommend
-mkisofs 1.13 (distributed with cdrecord 1.9), but 1.12 might work as
-well (not tested.)
-
-To create an image, create a directory called "isolinux" (or, if you
-prefer, "boot/isolinux") underneath the root directory of your ISO
-image master file tree.  Copy isolinux.bin, a config file called
-"isolinux.cfg" (see syslinux.txt for details on the configuration
-file), and all necessary files (kernels, initrd, display files, etc.)
-into this directory, then use the following command to create your ISO
-image (add additional options as appropriate, such as -J or -R):
-
-	mkisofs -o <isoimage> \
-		-b isolinux/isolinux.bin -c isolinux/boot.cat \
-		-no-emul-boot -boot-load-size 4 -boot-info-table \
-		<root-of-iso-tree>
-
-(If you named the directory boot/isolinux that should of course be
--b boot/isolinux/isolinux.bin -c boot/isolinux/boot.cat.)
-
-ISOLINUX resolves pathnames the following way:
-
-- A pathname consists of names separated by slashes, Unix-style.
-- A leading / means it searches from the root directory; otherwise the
-  search is from the isolinux directory (think of this as the "current
-  directory".)
-- . and .. in pathname searches are not supported.
-- The maximum length of any pathname is 255 characters.
-
-Note that ISOLINUX only uses the "plain" ISO 9660 filenames, i.e. it
-does not support Rock Ridge or Joliet filenames.  It can still be used
-on a disk which uses Rock Ridge and/or Joliet extensions, of course.
-Under Linux, you can verify the plain filenames by mounting with the
-"-o norock,nojoliet" option to the mount command.  Note, however, that
-ISOLINUX does support "long" (level 2) ISO 9660 plain filenames, so if
-compatibility with short-names-only operating systems like MS-DOS is
-not an issue, you can use the "-l" or "-iso-level 2" option to mkisofs
-to generate long (up to 31 characters) plain filenames.
-
-ISOLINUX does not support discontiguous files, interleaved mode, or
-logical block and sector sizes other than 2048.  This should normally
-not be a problem.
-
-ISOLINUX is by default built in two versions, one version with extra
-debugging messages enabled.  If you are having problems with ISOLINUX,
-I would greatly appreciate if you could try out the debugging version
-(isolinux-debug.bin) and let me know what it reports.  The debugging
-version does not include hybrid mode support (see below.)
-
-
-      ++++ NOTE ON THE CONFIG FILE DIRECTORY ++++
-
-ISOLINUX will search for the config file directory in the order
-/boot/isolinux, /isolinux, /.  The first directory that exists is
-used, even if it contains no files.  Therefore, please make sure that
-these directories don't exist if you don't want ISOLINUX to use them.
-
-
-      ++++ HYBRID CD-ROM/HARD DISK MODE ++++
-
-Starting in version 3.72, ISOLINUX supports a "hybrid mode" which can
-be booted from either CD-ROM or from a device which BIOS considers a
-hard disk or ZIP disk, e.g. a USB key or similar.
-
-To enable this mode, the .iso image should be postprocessed with the
-"isohybrid" script from the utils directory:
-
-	isohybrid filename.iso
-
-This script creates the necessary additional information to be able to
-boot in hybrid mode.  It also pads out the image to an even multiple
-of 1 MB.
-
-This image can then be copied using any raw disk writing tool (on Unix
-systems, typically "dd" or "cat") to a USB disk, or written to a
-CD-ROM using standard CD burning tools.
-
-The ISO 9660 filesystem is encapsulated in a partition (which starts
-at offset zero, which may confuse some systems.)  This makes it
-possible for the operating system, once booted, to use the remainder
-of the device for persistent storage by creating a second partition.
-
-
-      ++++ BOOTING DOS (OR OTHER SIMILAR OPERATING SYSTEMS) ++++
-
-WARNING: This feature depends on BIOS functionality which is
-apparently broken in a very large number of BIOSes.  Therefore, this
-may not work on any particular system.  No workaround is possible; if
-you find that it doesn't work please complain to your vendor and
-indicate that "BIOS INT 13h AX=4C00h fails."
-
-To boot DOS, or other real-mode operating systems (protected-mode
-operating systems may or may not work correctly), using ISOLINUX, you
-need to prepare a disk image (usually a floppy image, but a hard disk
-image can be used on *most* systems) with the relevant operating
-system.  This file should be included on the CD-ROM in the /isolinux
-directory, and have a .img extension.  The ".img" extension does not
-have to be specified on the command line, but has to be explicitly
-specified if used in a "kernel" statement in isolinux.cfg.
-
-For a floppy image, the size of the image should be exactly one of the
-following:
-
-	1,228,800 bytes		- For a 1200K floppy image
-	1,474,560 bytes		- For a 1440K floppy image
-	2,949,120 bytes		- For a 2880K floppy image
-
-Any other size is assumed to be a hard disk image.  In order to work
-on as many systems as possible, a hard disk image should have exactly
-one partition, marked active, that covers the entire size of the disk
-image file.  Even so, hard disk images are not supported on all
-BIOSes.

config/release/3rdparty/syslinux/doc/keytab-lilo.txt

@@ -1,85 +0,0 @@
-This is the documentation for the keytab-lilo.pl program.  It was
-taken verbatim from the LILO-20 README file; only this header was
-added.
-
-LILO program code, documentation and auxiliary programs are
-Copyright 1992-1997 Werner Almesberger.
-All rights reserved.
-
-Redistribution and use in source and binary forms of parts of or the
-whole original or derived work are permitted provided that the
-original work is properly attributed to the author. The name of the
-author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from
-this software without specific prior written permission. This work
-is provided "as is" and without any express or implied warranties.
-
-To use a LILO keyboard table with Syslinux, specify the KBDMAP command
-in syslinux.cfg, for example:
-
-	kbdmap de.ktl
-
-============================================================================
-
-Keyboard translation
---------------------
-
-The PC keyboard emits so-called scan codes, which are basically key
-numbers. The BIOS then translates those scan codes to the character codes
-of the characters printed on the key-caps. By default, the BIOS normally
-assumes that the keyboard has a US layout. Once an operating system is
-loaded, this operating system can use a different mapping.
-
-At boot time, LILO only has access to the basic services provided by the
-BIOS and therefore receives the character codes for an US keyboard. It
-provides a simple mechanism to re-map the character codes to what is
-appropriate for the actual layout.*
-
-  *  The current mechanism isn't perfect, because it sits on top of the
-    scan code to character code translation performed by the BIOS. This
-    means that key combinations that don't produce any useful character on
-    the US keyboard will be ignored by LILO. The advantage of this approach
-    is its simplicity.
-
-
-Compiling keyboard translation tables
-- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
-
-LILO obtains layout information from the keyboard translation tables Linux
-uses for the text console. They are usually stored in
-/usr/lib/kbd/keytables. LILO comes with a program keytab-lilo.pl that reads
-those tables and generates a table suitable for use by the map installer.
-keytab-lilo.pl invokes the program loadkeys to print the tables in a format
-that is easy to parse.*
-
-  *  On some systems, only root can execute loadkeys. It is then necessary
-    to run keytab-lilo.pl as root too.
-
-keytab-lilo.pl is used as follows:
-
-  keytab-lilo.pl [ -p <old_code>=<new_code> ] ...
-    [<path>]<default_layout>[.<extension>] ]
-     [<path>]<kbd_layout>[.<extension>] ]
-
-   -p <old_code>=<new_code>
-     Specifies corrections ("patches") to the mapping obtained from the
-    translation table files. E.g. if pressing the upper case "A" should
-    yield an at sign, -p 65=64 would be used. The  -p  option can be
-    repeated any number of times. The codes can also be given as
-    hexadecimal or as octal numbers if they are prefixed with 0x or 0,
-    respectively.
-  <path>  The directory in which the file resides. The default path is
-    /usr/lib/kbd/keytables.
-  <extension>  Usually the trailing .map, which is automatically added if
-    the file name doesn't contain dots.
-  <default_layout>  Is the layout which specifies the translation by the
-    BIOS. If none is specified, us is assumed.
-  <kbd_layout>  Is the actual layout of the keyboard.
-
-keytab-lilo.pl writes the resulting translation table as a binary string to
-standard output. Such tables can be stored anywhere with any name, but the
-suggested naming convention is /boot/<kbd>.ktl ("Keyboard Table for Lilo"),
-where <kbd> is the name of the keyboard layout.
-
-Example:
-
-keytab-lilo.pl de >/boot/de.ktl

config/release/3rdparty/syslinux/doc/mboot.txt

@@ -1,26 +0,0 @@
-
-mboot.c32
----------
-
-mboot.c32 is a 32-bit comboot module that allows Syslinux and its
-variants to load and boot kernels that use the Multiboot standard
-(e.g. the Xen virtual machine monitor, and the Fiasco and GNU Mach
-microkernels).
-
-To load a multiboot kernel and modules in Syslinux, put mboot.c32 (from
-com32/modules) in the boot directory, and load it as the "kernel" in the
-configuration file.  The command-line to pass to mboot.c32 is the kernel
-command-line, followed by all the module command lines, separated with
-'---'.  For example, to load a Xen VMM, xenlinux and an initrd:
-
-DEFAULT mboot.c32 xen.gz dom0_mem=15000 nosmp noacpi --- linux.gz console=tty0 root=/dev/hda1 --- initrd.img
-
-or, as a choice in a menu:
-
-LABEL Xen
-  KERNEL mboot.c32
-  APPEND xen.gz dom0_mem=15000 nosmp noacpi --- linux.gz console=tty0 root=/dev/hda1 --- initrd.img
-
-mboot.c32 requires version 2.12 or later of Syslinux.
-
-Tim Deegan, May 2005

config/release/3rdparty/syslinux/doc/memdisk.txt

@@ -1,292 +0,0 @@
-[This documentation is rather crufty at the moment.]
-
-MEMDISK is meant to allow booting legacy operating systems via PXE,
-and as a workaround for BIOSes where ISOLINUX image support doesn't
-work.
-
-MEMDISK simulates a disk by claiming a chunk of high memory for the
-disk and a (very small - 2K typical) chunk of low (DOS) memory for the
-driver itself, then hooking the INT 13h (disk driver) and INT 15h
-(memory query) BIOS interrupts.
-
-MEMDISK allows for an OS to detect the MEMDISK instance.  (See the
-"Additional technical information" section below.)
-
-To use it, type on the Syslinux command line:
-
-memdisk initrd=diskimg.img
-
-... where diskimg.img is the disk image you want to boot from.
-
-[Obviously, the memdisk binary as well as your disk image file need to
-be present in the boot image directory.]
-
-... or add to your syslinux.cfg/pxelinux.cfg/isolinux.cfg something like:
-
-label dos
-    kernel memdisk
-    append initrd=dosboot.img
-
-Note the following:
-
-a) The disk image can be uncompressed or compressed with gzip or zip.
-
-b) If the disk image is less than 4,194,304 bytes (4096K, 4 MB) it is
-   assumed to be a floppy image and MEMDISK will try to guess its
-   geometry based on the size of the file.  MEMDISK recognizes all the
-   standard floppy sizes as well as common extended formats:
-
-     163,840 bytes  (160K) c=40 h=1 s=8		5.25" SSSD
-     184,320 bytes  (180K) c=40 h=1 s=9		5.25" SSSD
-     327,680 bytes  (320K) c=40 h=2 s=8		5.25" DSDD
-     368,640 bytes  (360K) c=40 h=2 s=9		5.25" DSDD
-     655,360 bytes  (640K) c=80 h=2 s=8		3.5"  DSDD
-     737,280 bytes  (720K) c=80 h=2 s=9		3.5"  DSDD
-   1,222,800 bytes (1200K) c=80 h=2 s=15	5.25" DSHD
-   1,474,560 bytes (1440K) c=80 h=2 s=18	3.5"  DSHD
-   1,638,400 bytes (1600K) c=80 h=2 s=20	3.5"  DSHD (extended)
-   1,720,320 bytes (1680K) c=80 h=2 s=21	3.5"  DSHD (extended)
-   1,763,328 bytes (1722K) c=82 h=2 s=21	3.5"  DSHD (extended)
-   1,784,832 bytes (1743K) c=83 h=2 s=21	3.5"  DSHD (extended)
-   1,802,240 bytes (1760K) c=80 h=2 s=22	3.5"  DSHD (extended)
-   1,884,160 bytes (1840K) c=80 h=2 s=23	3.5"  DSHD (extended)
-   1,966,080 bytes (1920K) c=80 h=2 s=24	3.5"  DSHD (extended)
-   2,949,120 bytes (2880K) c=80 h=2 s=36	3.5"  DSED
-   3,194,880 bytes (3120K) c=80 h=2 s=39	3.5"  DSED (extended)
-   3,276,800 bytes (3200K) c=80 h=2 s=40	3.5"  DSED (extended)
-   3,604,480 bytes (3520K) c=80 h=2 s=44	3.5"  DSED (extended)
-   3,932,160 bytes (3840K) c=80 h=2 s=48	3.5"  DSED (extended)
-
-   A small perl script is included in the MEMDISK directory which can
-   determine the geometry that MEMDISK would select for other sizes;
-   in general MEMDISK will correctly detect most physical extended
-   formats used, with 80 cylinders or slightly more.
-
-   If the image is 4 MB or larger, it is assumed to be a hard disk
-   image, and should typically have an MBR and a partition table.  It
-   may optionally have a DOSEMU geometry header; in which case the
-   header is used to determine the C/H/S geometry of the disk.
-   Otherwise, the geometry is determined by examining the partition
-   table, so the entire image should be partitioned for proper
-   operation (it may be divided between multiple partitions, however.)
-
-   You can also specify the geometry manually with the following command
-   line options:
-
-   c=#		Specify number of cylinders (max 1024[*])
-   h=#		Specify number of heads (max 256[*])
-   s=#		Specify number of sectors (max 63)
-   floppy[=#]	The image is a floppy image[**]
-   harddisk[=#]	The image is a hard disk image[**]
-   iso		The image is an El Torito ISO9660 image (drive 0xE0)
-
-   # represents a decimal number.
-
-    [*] MS-DOS only allows max 255 heads, and only allows 255 cylinders
-        on floppy disks.
-
-   [**] Normally MEMDISK emulates the first floppy or hard disk.  This
-        can be overridden by specifying an index, e.g. floppy=1 will
-        simulate fd1 (B:). This may not work on all operating systems
-        or BIOSes.
-
-c) The disk is normally writable (although, of course, there is
-   nothing backing it up, so it only lasts until reset.)  If you want,
-   you can mimic a write-protected disk by specifying the command line
-   option:
-
-   ro		Disk is readonly
-
-d) MEMDISK normally uses the BIOS "INT 15h mover" API to access high
-   memory.  This is well-behaved with extended memory managers which load
-   later.  Unfortunately it appears that the "DOS boot disk" from
-   WinME/XP *deliberately* crash the system when this API is invoked.
-   The following command-line options tells MEMDISK to enter protected
-   mode directly, whenever possible:
-
-   raw		Use raw access to protected mode memory.
-
-   bigraw	Use raw access to protected mode memory, and leave the
-		CPU in "big real" mode afterwards.
-
-   int		Use plain INT 15h access to protected memory.  This assumes
-   		that anything which hooks INT 15h knows what it is doing.
-
-   safeint	Use INT 15h access to protected memory, but invoke
-		INT 15h the way it was *before* MEMDISK was loaded.
-		This is the default since version 3.73.
-
-e) MEMDISK by default supports EDD/EBIOS on hard disks, but not on
-   floppy disks.  This can be controlled with the options:
-
-   edd		Enable EDD/EBIOS
-   noedd	Disable EDD/EBIOS
-
-f) The following option can be used to pause to view the messages:
-
-   pause	Wait for a keypress right before booting
-
-g) The following option can be used to set the real-mode stack size.
-   The default is 512 bytes, but if there is a failure it might be
-   interesting to set it to something larger:
-
-   stack=size   Set the stack to "size" bytes
-
-h) Some systems without a floppy drive have been known to have
-   problems with floppy images.  To avoid that those problems, first
-   of all make sure you don't have a floppy drive configured on the
-   BIOS screen.  If there is no option to configure that, or that
-   doesn't work, you can use the option:
-
-   nopass	Hide all real drives of the same type (floppy or hard disk)
-   nopassany    Hide all real drives (floppy and hard disk)
-
-
-Some interesting things to note:
-
-If you're using MEMDISK to boot DOS from a CD-ROM (using ISOLINUX),
-you might find the generic El Torito CD-ROM driver by Gary Tong and
-Bart Lagerweij useful.  It is now included with the Syslinux
-distribution, in the dosutil directory.  See the file
-dosutil/eltorito.txt for more information.
-
-Similarly, if you're booting DOS over the network using PXELINUX, you
-can use the "keeppxe" option and use the generic PXE (UNDI) NDIS
-network driver, which is part of the PROBOOT.EXE distribution from
-Intel:
-
-	http://www.intel.com/support/network/adapter/1000/software.htm
-
-
-Additional technical information:
-
-Starting with version 2.08, MEMDISK now supports an installation check
-API.  This works as follows:
-
-	EAX = 454D08xxh ("ME") (08h = parameter query)
-	ECX = 444Dxxxxh ("MD")
-	EDX = 5349xxnnh	("IS") (nn = drive #)
-	EBX = 3F4Bxxxxh ("K?")
-	INT 13h
-
-If drive nn is a MEMDISK, the registers will contain:
-
-	EAX = 4D21xxxxh	("!M")
-	ECX = 4D45xxxxh ("EM")
-	EDX = 4944xxxxh ("DI")
-	EBX = 4B53xxxxh ("SK")
-
-	ES:DI -> MEMDISK info structures
-
-The low parts of EAX/ECX/EDX/EBX have the normal return values for INT
-13h, AH=08h, i.e. information of the disk geometry etc.
-
-See Ralf Brown's interrupt list,
-http://www.cs.cmu.edu/afs/cs.cmu.edu/user/ralf/pub/WWW/files.html or
-http://www.ctyme.com/rbrown.htm, for a detailed description.
-
-The MEMDISK info structure currently contains:
-
-	[ES:DI]		word	Total size of structure (currently 30 bytes)
-	[ES:DI+2]	byte	MEMDISK minor version
-	[ES:DI+3]	byte	MEMDISK major version
-	[ES:DI+4]	dword	Pointer to MEMDISK data in high memory
-	[ES:DI+8]	dword	Size of MEMDISK data in sectors
-	[ES:DI+12]	16:16	Far pointer to command line
-	[ES:DI+16]	16:16	Old INT 13h pointer
-	[ES:DI+20]	16:16	Old INT 15h pointer
-	[ES:DI+24]	word	Amount of DOS memory before MEMDISK loaded
-	[ES:DI+26]	byte	Boot loader ID
-	[ES:DI+27]	byte	Sector size as a power of 2
-				(If zero, assume 512-byte sectors)
-	[ES:DI+28]	word	If nonzero, offset (vs ES) to installed DPT
-				This pointer+16 contains the original INT 1Eh
-
-Sizes of this structure:
-
-3.71+		30 bytes	Added DPT pointer
-3.00-3.70	27 bytes	Added boot loader ID
-pre-3.00	26 bytes
-
-In addition, the following fields are available at [ES:0]:
-
-	[ES:0]		word	Offset of INT 13h routine (segment == ES)
-	[ES:2]		word	Offset of INT 15h routine (segment == ES)
-
-The program mdiskchk.c in the sample directory is an example on how
-this API can be used.
-
-The following code can be used to "disable" MEMDISK.  Note that it
-does not free the handler in DOS memory, and that running this from
-DOS will probably crash your machine (DOS doesn't like drives suddenly
-disappearing from underneath.)  This is also not necessarily the best
-method for this.
-
-	mov eax, 454D0800h
-	mov ecx, 444D0000h
-	mov edx, 53490000h
-	mov dl,drive_number
-	mov ebx, 3F4B0000h
-	int 13h
-
-	shr eax, 16
-	cmp ax, 4D21h
-	jne not_memdisk
-	shr ecx, 16
-	cmp cx, 4D45h
-	jne not_memdisk
-	shr edx, 16
-	cmp dx, 4944h
-	jne not_memdisk
-	shr ebx, 16
-	cmp bx, 4B53h
-	jne not_memdisk
-
-	cli
-	mov bx,[es:0]		; INT 13h handler offset
-	mov eax,[es:di+16]	; Old INT 13h handler
-	mov byte [es:bx], 0EAh	; FAR JMP
-	mov [es:bx+1], eax
-
-	mov bx,[es:2]		; INT 15h handler offset
-	mov eax,[es:di+20]	; Old INT 15h handler
-	mov byte [es:bx], 0EAh	; FAR JMP
-	mov [es:bx+1], eax
-	sti
-
-MEMDISK supports the Win9x "safe hook" structure for OS detection.
-(See "Safe Master Boot Record INT 13h Hook Routines," available at
-http://www.osronline.com/ddkx/w98ddk/storage_5l6g.htm as of
-December 7th, 2009.)  An OS driver can take a look at the INTerrupt table
-and try to walk along the chain of those hooks that implement the "safe hook"
-structure.  For each hook discovered, a vendor can be identified and the OS
-driver can take appropriate action.  The OS driver can mark the "flags" field
-of the "safe hook" to indicate that the driver has reviewed it already.  This
-prevents accidental re-detection, for example.
-
-MEMDISK adds one additional extension field to the "safe hook" structure, a
-pointer to a special MEMDISK structure called the "mBFT."  The mBFT is the
-"MEMDISK Boot Firmware Table" (akin to the iSCSI iBFT and the AoE aBFT).  An
-OS driver looking at MEMDISK's "safe hook" should know that this field will
-be present based on the fact that MEMDISK is the vendor identifier.
-
-The mBFT is little more than an ACPI table to prefix MEMDISK's traditional
-MEMDISK info structure (the "MDI").  The ACPI table's details are:
-
-  OEM ID. . . .: MEMDSK
-  OEM Table ID : Syslinux
-
-There is a 1-byte checksum field which covers the length of the mBFT all
-the way through to the end of the MEMDISK info structure.
-
-There is also a physical pointer to the "safe hook" structure associated
-with the MEMDISK instance.  An OS driver might use the following logic:
-
-  1. Walk INT 13h "safe hook" chain as far as possible, marking hooks as
-     having been reviewed.  For MEMDISK hooks, the driver then follows the
-     pointer to the mBFT and gathers the RAM disk details from the included
-     MDI.
-  2. The OS driver scans low memory for valid mBFTs.  MEMDISK instances that
-     have been "disconnected" from the INT 13h "safe hook" chain can be thus
-     discovered.  Looking at their associated "safe hook" structure will
-     reveal if they were indeed reviewed by the previous stage.

config/release/3rdparty/syslinux/doc/menu.txt

@@ -1,566 +0,0 @@
-There are two menu systems included with Syslinux, the advanced menu
-system, and the simple menu system.
-
-
-+++ THE ADVANCED MENU SYSTEM +++
-
-The advanced menu system, written by Murali Krishnan Ganapathy, is
-located in the menu/ subdirectly.  It allows the user to create
-hierarchial submenus, dynamic options, checkboxes, and just about
-anything you want.  It requires that the menu is compiled from a
-simple C file, see menu/simple.c and menu/complex.c for examples.
-
-The advanced menu system doesn't support serial console at this time.
-
-See menu/README for more information.
-
-
-+++ THE SIMPLE MENU SYSTEM +++
-
-The simple menu system is a single module located at
-com32/modules/vesamenu.c32 (graphical) or com32/modules/menu.c32 (text
-mode only).  It uses the same configuration file as the regular
-Syslinux command line, and displays all the LABEL statements.
-
-To use the menu system, simply make sure [vesa]menu.c32 is in the
-appropriate location for your boot medium (the same directory as the
-configuration file for SYSLINUX, EXTLINUX and ISOLINUX, and the same
-directory as pxelinux.0 for PXELINUX), and put the following options
-in your configuration file:
-
-UI menu.c32
-
-
-There are a few menu additions to the configuration file, all starting
-with the keywords MENU or TEXT; like the rest of the Syslinux config
-file language, it is case insensitive:
-
-
-MENU TITLE title
-
-	Give the menu a title.  The title is presented at the top of
-	the menu.
-
-
-MENU HIDDEN
-
-	Do not display the actual menu unless the user presses a key.
-	All that is displayed is a timeout message.
-
-
-MENU CLEAR
-
-	Clear the screen when exiting the menu, instead of leaving the
-	menu displayed.  For vesamenu, this means the graphical
-	background is still displayed without the menu itself for as
-	long as the screen remains in graphics mode.
-
-
-MENU SHIFTKEY
-
-	Exit the menu system immediately unless either the Shift or Alt
-	key is pressed, or Caps Lock or Scroll Lock is set.
-
-
-MENU SEPARATOR
-
-	Insert an empty line in the menu.
-
-
-MENU LABEL label
-
-	(Only valid after a LABEL statement.)
-	Changes the label displayed for a specific entry.  This allows
-	you to have a label that isn't suitable for the command line,
-	for example:
-
-	# Soft Cap Linux
-	LABEL softcap
-		MENU LABEL Soft Cap ^Linux 9.6.36
-		KERNEL softcap-9.6.36.bzi
-		APPEND whatever
-
-	# A very dense operating system
-	LABEL brick
-		MENU LABEL ^Windows CE/ME/NT
-		KERNEL chain.c32
-		APPEND hd0 2
-
-	The ^ symbol in a MENU LABEL statement defines a hotkey.
-	The hotkey will be highlighted in the menu and will move the
-	menu cursor immediately to that entry.
-
-	Reusing hotkeys is disallowed, subsequent entries will not be
-	highlighted, and will not work.
-
-	Keep in mind that the LABELs, not MENU LABELs, must be unique,
-	or odd things will happen to the command-line.
-
-
-MENU INDENT count
-
-	(Only valid after a LABEL statement.)
-	Will add "count" spaces in front of the displayed menu entry.
-
-
-MENU DISABLE
-
-	(Only valid after a LABEL statement.)
-	Makes the entry unselectable.  This allows you to make a
-	section in your menu with different options below it.
-	for example:
-
-	# Entries for network boots
-	LABEL -
-		MENU LABEL Network:
-		MENU DISABLE
-
-	# Soft Cap Linux
-	LABEL softcap
-		MENU LABEL Soft Cap ^Linux 9.6.36
-		MENU INDENT 1
-		KERNEL softcap-9.6.36.bzi
-		APPEND whatever
-
-	# Dos 6.22
-	LABEL dos
-		MENU LABEL ^Dos 6.22
-		MENU INDENT 1
-		KERNEL memdisk
-		APPEND initrd=dos622.imz
-
-	# Separator
-	MENU SEPARATOR
-
-	# Entries for local boots
-	LABEL -
-		MENU LABEL Local:
-		MENU DISABLE
-
-	# Windows 2000
-	LABEL w2k
-		MENU LABEL ^Windows 2000
-		MENU INDENT 1
-		KERNEL chain.c32
-		APPEND hd0 1
-
-	# Windows XP
-	LABEL xp
-		MENU LABEL Windows ^XP
-		MENU INDENT 1
-		KERNEL chain.c32
-		APPEND hd0 2
-
-MENU HIDE
-
-	(Only valid after a LABEL statement.)
-	Suppresses a particular LABEL entry from the menu.
-
-
-MENU DEFAULT
-
-	(Only valid after a LABEL statement.)
-
-	Indicates that this entry should be the default for this
-	particular submenu.  See also the DEFAULT directive below.
-
-
-TEXT HELP
-Help text ...
-... which can span multiple lines
-ENDTEXT
-
-	(Only valid after a LABEL statement.)
-
-	Specifies a help text that should be displayed when a particular
-	selection is highlighted.
-
-
-MENU PASSWD passwd
-
-	(Only valid after a LABEL statement.)
-
-	Sets a password on this menu entry.  "passwd" can be either a
-	cleartext password or a password encrypted with one of the
-	following algorithms:
-
-	MD5		(Signature: $1$)
-	SHA-1		(Signature: $4$)
-	SHA-2-256	(Signature: $5$)
-	SHA-2-512	(Signature: $6$)
-
-	Use the included Perl scripts "sha1pass" or "md5pass" to
-	encrypt passwords.  MD5 passwords are compatible with most
-	Unix password file utilities; SHA-1 passwords are probably
-	unique to Syslinux; SHA-2 passwords are compatible with very
-	recent Linux distributions.  Obviously, if you don't encrypt
-	your passwords they will not be very secure at all.
-
-	If you are using passwords, you want to make sure you also use
-	the settings "NOESCAPE 1", "PROMPT 0", and either set
-	"ALLOWOPTIONS 0" or use a master password (see below.)
-
-	If passwd is an empty string, this menu entry can only be
-	unlocked with the master password.
-
-
-MENU MASTER PASSWD passwd
-
-	Sets a master password.  This password can be used to boot any
-	menu entry, and is required for the [Tab] and [Esc] keys to
-	work.
-
-
-MENU RESOLUTION height width
-
-	Requests a specific screen resolution when in graphics mode.
-	The default is "640 480" corresponding to a resolution of
-	640x480 pixels, which all VGA-compatible monitors should be
-	able to display.
-
-	If the selected resolution is unavailable, the text mode menu
-	is displayed instead.
-
-
-MENU BACKGROUND background
-
-	For vesamenu.c32, sets the background image.  The background
-	can either be a color (see MENU COLOR) or the name of an image
-	file, which should be the size of the screen (normally 640x480
-	pixels, but see MENU RESOLUTION) and either in PNG, JPEG or
-	LSS16 format.
-
-
-MENU BEGIN [tagname]
-MENU END
-
-	Begin/end a submenu.  The entries between MENU BEGIN and MENU
-	END form a submenu, which is marked with a > mark on the right
-	hand of the screen.  Submenus inherit the properties of their
-	parent menus, but can override them, and can thus have their
-	own backgrounds, master passwords, titles, timeouts, messages
-	and so forth.
-
-
-MENU GOTO tagname
-
-	(Only valid after a LABEL statement.)
-
-	This label will transfer to the named submenu instead of
-	booting anything.  To transfer to the top-level menu, specify
-	"menu goto .top".
-
-
-MENU EXIT [tagname]
-
-	(Only valid after a label statement inside MENU BEGIN ...
-	MENU END)
-
-	Exit to the next higher menu, or, if tagname is specified, to
-	the named menu.
-
-
-MENU QUIT
-
-	(Only valid after a LABEL statement.)
-
-	This label quits the menu system.
-
-	WARNING: if MENU MASTER PASSWD or ALLOWOPTIONS 0 is set, this
-	will still allow exiting to the CLI; however, a separate MENU
-	PASSWD can of course be set for this label.
-
-
-MENU START
-
-	(Only valid inside MENU BEGIN ... MENU END)
-
-	Indicates that the menu system should start at the menu being
-	defined instead of at the top-level menu.  See also the
-	DEFAULT directive below.
-
-
-DEFAULT label
-
-	Set the global default.  If "label" points into a submenu,
-	that menu becomes the start menu; in other words, this
-	directive has the same effect as both MENU DEFAULT and MENU
-	START.
-
-	For backwards compatibility with earlier versions of Syslinux,
-	this directive is ignored unless the configuration file also
-	contains a UI directive.
-
-	Note: the CLI accepts options after the label, or even a
-	non-label.  The menu system does not support that.
-
-
-MENU SAVE
-MENU NOSAVE
-
-	Remember the last entry selected and make that the default for
-	the next boot.  A password-protected menu entry is *not*
-	saved.  This requires the ADV data storage mechanism, which is
-	currently only implemented for EXTLINUX, although the other
-	Syslinux derivatives will accept the command (and ignore it.)
-
-	NOTE: MENU SAVE stores the LABEL tag of the selected entry;
-	this mechanism therefore relies on LABEL tags being unique.
-	On the other hand, it handles changes in the configuration
-	file gracefully.
-
-	NOTE: In software RAID-1 setups MENU SAVE only stores the
-	default label on the actual boot disk.  This may lead to
-	inconsistent reads from the array, or unexpectedly change the
-	default label after array resynchronization or disk failure.
-
-	The MENU SAVE information can be fully cleared with
-	"extlinux --reset-adv <bootdir>".
-
-	A MENU SAVE or MENU NOSAVE at the top of a (sub)menu affects
-	all entries underneath that (sub)menu except those that in
-	turn have MENU SAVE or MENU NOSAVE declared.  This can be used
-	to only save certain entires when selected.
-
-
-INCLUDE filename [tagname]
-MENU INCLUDE filename [tagname]
-
-	Include the contents of the configuration file filename at
-	this point.
-
-	In the case of MENU INCLUDE, the included data is only seen by
-	the menu system; the core syslinux code does not parse this
-	command, so any labels defined in it are unavailable.
-
-	If a tagname is included, the whole file is considered to have
-	been bracketed with a MENU BEGIN tagname ... MENU END pair,
-	and will therefore show up as a submenu.
-
-
-MENU AUTOBOOT message
-
-	Replaces the message "Automatic boot in # second{,s}...".  The
-	symbol # is replaced with the number of seconds remaining.
-	The syntax "{singular,[dual,]plural}" can be used to conjugate
-	appropriately.
-
-
-MENU TABMSG message
-
-	Replaces the message "Press [Tab] to edit options".
-
-
-MENU NOTABMSG message
-
-	Takes the place of the TABMSG message if option editing is
-	disabled.  Defaults to blank.
-
-
-MENU PASSPROMPT message
-
-	Replaces the message "Password required".
-
-
-MENU COLOR element ansi foreground background shadow
-
-	Sets the color of element "element" to the specified color
-	sequence:
-
-	screen          Rest of the screen
-	border          Border area
-	title           Title bar
-	unsel           Unselected menu item
-	hotkey          Unselected hotkey
-	sel             Selection bar
-	hotsel          Selected hotkey
-	disabled	Disabled menu item
-	scrollbar       Scroll bar
-	tabmsg          Press [Tab] message
-	cmdmark         Command line marker
-	cmdline         Command line
-	pwdborder       Password box border
-	pwdheader       Password box header
-	pwdentry        Password box contents
-	timeout_msg     Timeout message
-	timeout         Timeout counter
-	help		Help text
-	msgXX		Message (F-key) file attribute XX
-
-	... where XX is two hexadecimal digits (the "plain text" is 07).
-
-	"ansi" is a sequence of semicolon-separated ECMA-48 Set
-	Graphics Rendition (<ESC>[m) sequences:
-
-	0     reset all attributes to their defaults
-	1     set bold
-	4     set underscore (simulated with color on a color display)
-	5     set blink
-	7     set reverse video
-	22    set normal intensity
-	24    underline off
-	25    blink off
-	27    reverse video off
-	30    set black foreground
-	31    set red foreground
-	32    set green foreground
-	33    set brown foreground
-	34    set blue foreground
-	35    set magenta foreground
-	36    set cyan foreground
-	37    set white foreground
-	38    set underscore on, set default foreground color
-	39    set underscore off, set default foreground color
-	40    set black background
-	41    set red background
-	42    set green background
-	43    set brown background
-	44    set blue background
-	45    set magenta background
-	46    set cyan background
-	47    set white background
-	49    set default background color
-
-	These are used (a) in text mode, and (b) on the serial
-	console.
-
-	"foreground" and "background" are color codes in #AARRGGBB
-	notation, where AA RR GG BB are hexadecimal digits for alpha
-	(opacity), red, green and blue, respectively.  #00000000
-	represents fully transparent, and #ffffffff represents opaque
-	white.
-
-	"shadow" controls the handling of the graphical console text
-	shadow.  Permitted values are "none" (no shadowing), "std" or
-	"standard" (standard shadowing - foreground pixels are
-	raised), "all" (both background and foreground raised), and
-	"rev" or "reverse" (background pixels are raised.)
-
-	If any field is set to "*" or omitted (at the end of the line)
-	then that field is left unchanged.
-
-
-	The current defaults are:
-
-	menu color screen	37;40      #80ffffff #00000000 std
-	menu color border	30;44      #40000000 #00000000 std
-	menu color title	1;36;44    #c00090f0 #00000000 std
-	menu color unsel	37;44      #90ffffff #00000000 std
-	menu color hotkey	1;37;44    #ffffffff #00000000 std
-	menu color sel		7;37;40    #e0000000 #20ff8000 all
-	menu color hotsel	1;7;37;40  #e0400000 #20ff8000 all
-	menu color disabled	1;30;44    #60cccccc #00000000 std
-	menu color scrollbar	30;44      #40000000 #00000000 std
-	menu color tabmsg	31;40      #90ffff00 #00000000 std
-	menu color cmdmark	1;36;40    #c000ffff #00000000 std
-	menu color cmdline	37;40      #c0ffffff #00000000 std
-	menu color pwdborder	30;47      #80ffffff #20ffffff std
-	menu color pwdheader	31;47      #80ff8080 #20ffffff std
-	menu color pwdentry	30;47      #80ffffff #20ffffff std
-	menu color timeout_msg	37;40      #80ffffff #00000000 std
-	menu color timeout	1;37;40    #c0ffffff #00000000 std
-	menu color help		37;40      #c0ffffff #00000000 std
-	menu color msg07	37;40      #90ffffff #00000000 std
-
-
-MENU MSGCOLOR fg_filter bg_filter shadow
-
-	Sets *all* the msgXX colors to a color scheme derived from the
-	fg_filter and bg_filter values.  Background color zero is
-	always treated as transparent.  The default corresponds to:
-
-	menu msgcolor #90ffffff #80ffffff std
-
-	This directive should come before any directive that
-	customizes individual msgXX colors.
-
-
-MENU WIDTH 80
-MENU MARGIN 10
-MENU PASSWORDMARGIN 3
-MENU ROWS 12
-MENU TABMSGROW 18
-MENU CMDLINEROW 18
-MENU ENDROW -1
-MENU PASSWORDROW 11
-MENU TIMEOUTROW 20
-MENU HELPMSGROW 22
-MENU HELPMSGENDROW -1
-MENU HIDDENROW -2
-MENU HSHIFT 0
-MENU VSHIFT 0
-
-	These options control the layout of the menu on the screen.
-	The values above are the defaults.
-
-	A negative value is relative to the calculated length of the
-	screen (25 for text mode, 28 for VESA graphics mode.)
-
-
-F1 textfile [background]
-...
-F12 textfile [background]
-
-	Displays full-screen help (also available at the command line.)
-	The same control code sequences as in the command line
-	interface are supported, although some are ignored.
-
-	Additionally, a optional second argument allows a different
-	background image (see MENU BACKGROUND for supported formats)
-	to be displayed.
-
-
-MENU HELP textfile [background]
-
-	Creates a menu entry which, when selected, displays
-	full-screen help in the same way as the F-key help.
-
-
-The menu system honours the TIMEOUT command; if TIMEOUT is specified
-it will execute the ONTIMEOUT command if one exists, otherwise it will
-pick the default menu option.  WARNING: the timeout action will bypass
-password protection even if one is set for the specified or default
-entry!
-
-Normally, the user can press [Tab] to edit the menu entry, and [Esc]
-to return to the Syslinux command line.  However, if the configuration
-file specifies ALLOWOPTIONS 0, these keys will be disabled, and if
-MENU MASTER PASSWD is set, they require the master password.
-
-The simple menu system supports serial console, using the normal
-SERIAL directive.  However, it can be quite slow over a slow serial
-link; you probably want to set your baudrate to 38400 or higher if
-possible.  It requires a Linux/VT220/ANSI-compatible terminal on the
-other end.
-
-
-	+++ USING AN ALTERNATE CONFIGURATION FILE +++
-
-
-It is also possible to load a secondary configuration file, to get to
-another menu.  To do that, invoke menu.c32 with the name of the
-secondary configuration file.
-
-LABEL othermenu
-	MENU LABEL Another Menu
-	KERNEL menu.c32
-	APPEND othermenu.conf
-
-If you specify more than one file, they will all be read, in the order
-specified.  The dummy filename ~ (tilde) is replaced with the filename
-of the main configuration file.
-
-# The file graphics.conf contains common color and layout commands for
-# all menus.
-LABEL othermenu
-	MENU LABEL Another Menu
-	KERNEL vesamenu.c32
-	APPEND graphics.conf othermenu.conf
-
-# Return to the main menu
-LABEL mainmenu
-	MENU LABEL Return to Main Menu
-	KERNEL vesamenu.c32
-	APPEND graphics.conf ~
-
-See also the MENU INCLUDE directive above.

config/release/3rdparty/syslinux/doc/pxelinux.txt

@@ -1,418 +0,0 @@
-                               PXELINUX
-
-    A bootloader for Linux using the PXE network booting protocol
-
-       Copyright 1994-2008 H. Peter Anvin - All Rights Reserved
-
-This program is provided under the terms of the GNU General Public
-License, version 2 or, at your option, any later version.  There is no
-warranty, neither expressed nor implied, to the function of this
-program.  Please see the included file COPYING for details.
-
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-PXELINUX is a Syslinux derivative, for booting Linux off a network
-server, using a network ROM conforming to the Intel PXE (Pre-Execution
-Environment) specification.  PXELINUX is *not* a program that is
-intended to be flashed or burned into a PROM on the network card; if
-you want that, check out Etherboot (http://www.etherboot.org/).
-Etherboot 5.4 or later can also be used to create a PXE-compliant boot
-PROM for many network cards.
-
-
-    ++++ HOW TO CONFIGURE PXELINUX ++++
-
-PXELINUX operates in many ways like SYSLINUX.  If you are not familiar
-with SYSLINUX, read syslinux.txt first, since this documentation only
-explains the differences.
-
-On the TFTP server, create the directory "/tftpboot", and copy the
-following files to it:
-
-	pxelinux.0		- from the Syslinux distribution
-
-	any kernel or initrd images you want to boot
-
-Finally, create the directory "/tftpboot/pxelinux.cfg".  The
-configuration file (equivalent of syslinux.cfg -- see syslinux.txt for
-the options here) will live in this directory.  Because more than one
-system may be booted from the same server, the configuration file name
-depends on the IP address of the booting machine.  PXELINUX will
-search for its config file on the boot server in the following way:
-
-  First, it will search for the config file using the client UUID, if
-  one is provided by the PXE stack (note, some BIOSes don't have a
-  valid UUID, and you might end up with something like all 1's.)  This is
-  in the standard UUID format using lower case hexadecimal digits, e.g.
-  b8945908-d6a6-41a9-611d-74a6ab80b83d.
-
-  Next, it will search for the config file using the hardware type
-  (using its ARP type code) and address, all in lower case hexadecimal
-  with dash separators; for example, for an Ethernet (ARP type 1)
-  with address 88:99:AA:BB:CC:DD it would search for the filename
-  01-88-99-aa-bb-cc-dd.
-
-  Next, it will search for the config file using its own IP address
-  in upper case hexadecimal, e.g. 192.0.2.91 -> C000025B
-  (you can use the included progam "gethostip" to compute the
-  hexadecimal IP address for any host.)
-
-  If that file is not found, it will remove one hex digit and try
-  again.  Ultimately, it will try looking for a file named "default"
-  (in lower case).
-
-  As an example, if the boot file name is /mybootdir/pxelinux.0, the
-  UUID is b8945908-d6a6-41a9-611d-74a6ab80b83d, the Ethernet MAC
-  address is 88:99:AA:BB:CC:DD and the IP address 192.0.2.91, it will
-  try:
-
-	/mybootdir/pxelinux.cfg/b8945908-d6a6-41a9-611d-74a6ab80b83d
-	/mybootdir/pxelinux.cfg/01-88-99-aa-bb-cc-dd
-	/mybootdir/pxelinux.cfg/C000025B
-	/mybootdir/pxelinux.cfg/C000025
-	/mybootdir/pxelinux.cfg/C00002
-	/mybootdir/pxelinux.cfg/C0000
-	/mybootdir/pxelinux.cfg/C000
-	/mybootdir/pxelinux.cfg/C00
-	/mybootdir/pxelinux.cfg/C0
-	/mybootdir/pxelinux.cfg/C
-	/mybootdir/pxelinux.cfg/default
-
-  ... in that order.
-
-Note that all filename references are relative to the directory
-pxelinux.0 lives in.  PXELINUX generally requires that filenames
-(including any relative path) are 127 characters or shorter in length.
-
-Starting in release 3.20, PXELINUX will no longer apply a built-in
-default if it cannot find any configuration file at all; instead it
-will reboot after the timeout interval has expired.  This keeps a
-machine from getting stuck indefinitely due to a boot server failure.
-
-Starting in release 3.50, PXELINUX displays network information at
-the boot prompt pressing <Ctrl-N>.
-
-PXELINUX does not support MTFTP, and I have no plans of doing so, as
-MTFTP is inherently broken for files more than 65535 packets (about
-92 MB) in size.  It is of course possible to use MTFTP for the initial
-boot, if you have such a setup.  MTFTP server setup is beyond the
-scope of this document.
-
-
-    ++++ SETTING UP THE TFTP SERVER ++++
-
-PXELINUX currently requires that the boot server has a TFTP server
-which supports the "tsize" TFTP option (RFC 1784/RFC 2349).  The
-"tftp-hpa" TFTP server, which support options, is available at:
-
-	http://www.kernel.org/pub/software/network/tftp/
-	ftp://www.kernel.org/pub/software/network/tftp/
-
-... and on any kernel.org mirror (see http://www.kernel.org/mirrors/).
-
-Another TFTP server which supports this is atftp by Jean-Pierre
-Lefebvre:
-
-	ftp://ftp.mamalinux.com/pub/atftp/
-
-If your boot server is running Windows (and you can't fix that), try
-tftpd32 by Philippe Jounin (you need version 2.11 or later; previous
-versions had a bug which made it incompatible with PXELINUX):
-
-	http://tftpd32.jounin.net/
-
-
-    ++++ SETTING UP THE DHCP SERVER ++++
-
-The PXE protocol uses a very complex set of extensions to DHCP or
-BOOTP.  However, most PXE implementations -- this includes all Intel
-ones version 0.99n and later -- seem to be able to boot in a
-"conventional" DHCP/TFTP configuration.  Assuming you don't have to
-support any very old or otherwise severely broken clients, this is
-probably the best configuration unless you already have a PXE boot
-server on your network.
-
-A sample DHCP setup, using the "conventional TFTP" configuration,
-would look something like the following, using ISC dhcp 2.0 dhcpd.conf
-syntax:
-
-        allow booting;
-        allow bootp;
-
-	# Standard configuration directives...
-
-        option domain-name "<domain name>";
-        option subnet-mask <subnet mask>;
-        option broadcast-address <broadcast address>;
-        option domain-name-servers <dns servers>;
-        option routers <default router>;
-
-	# Group the PXE bootable hosts together
-	group {
-		# PXE-specific configuration directives...
-		next-server <TFTP server address>;
-		filename "/tftpboot/pxelinux.0";
-
-		# You need an entry like this for every host
-		# unless you're using dynamic addresses
-	        host <hostname> {
-		        hardware ethernet <ethernet address>;
-			fixed-address <hostname>;
-		}
-	}
-
-Note that if your particular TFTP daemon runs under chroot (tftp-hpa
-will do this if you specify the -s (secure) option; this is highly
-recommended), you almost certainly should not include the /tftpboot
-prefix in the filename statement.
-
-If this does not work for your configuration, you probably should set
-up a "PXE boot server" on port 4011 of your TFTP server; a free PXE
-boot server is available at:
-
-	http://www.kano.org.uk/projects/pxe/
-
-With such a boot server defined, your DHCP configuration should look
-the same except for an "option dhcp-class-identifier" ("option
-vendor-class-identifier" if you are using DHCP 3.0):
-
-        allow booting;
-        allow bootp;
-
-	# Standard configuration directives...
-
-        option domain-name "<domain name>";
-        option subnet-mask <subnet mask>;
-        option broadcast-address <broadcast address>;
-        option domain-name-servers <dns servers>;
-        option routers <default router>;
-
-	# Group the PXE bootable hosts together
-	group {
-		# PXE-specific configuration directives...
-	        option dhcp-class-identifier "PXEClient";
-		next-server <pxe boot server address>;
-
-		# You need an entry like this for every host
-		# unless you're using dynamic addresses
-	        host <hostname> {
-		        hardware ethernet <ethernet address>;
-			fixed-address <hostname>;
-		}
-	}
-
-Here, the boot file name is obtained from the PXE server.
-
-If the "conventional TFTP" configuration doesn't work on your clients,
-and setting up a PXE boot server is not an option, you can attempt the
-following configuration.  It has been known to boot some
-configurations correctly; however, there are no guarantees:
-
-        allow booting;
-        allow bootp;
-
-	# Standard configuration directives...
-
-        option domain-name "<domain name>";
-        option subnet-mask <subnet mask>;
-        option broadcast-address <broadcast address>;
-        option domain-name-servers <dns servers>;
-        option routers <default router>;
-
-	# Group the PXE bootable hosts together
-	group {
-		# PXE-specific configuration directives...
-	        option dhcp-class-identifier "PXEClient";
-		option vendor-encapsulated-options 09:0f:80:00:0c:4e:65:74:77:6f:72:6b:20:62:6f:6f:74:0a:07:00:50:72:6f:6d:70:74:06:01:02:08:03:80:00:00:47:04:80:00:00:00:ff;
-		next-server <TFTP server>;
-		filename "/tftpboot/pxelinux.0";
-
-		# You need an entry like this for every host
-		# unless you're using dynamic addresses
-	        host <hostname> {
-		        hardware ethernet <ethernet address>;
-			fixed-address <hostname>;
-		}
-	}
-
-Note that this *will not* boot some clients that *will* boot with the
-"conventional TFTP" configuration; Intel Boot Client 3.0 and later are
-known to fall into this category.
-
-
-    ++++ SPECIAL DHCP OPTIONS ++++
-
-PXELINUX (starting with version 1.62) supports the following
-nonstandard DHCP options, which depending on your DHCP server you may
-be able to use to customize the specific behaviour of PXELINUX.  See
-RFC 5071 for some additional information about these options.
-
-Option 208	pxelinux.magic
-	- Earlier versions of PXELINUX required this to be set to
-	  F1:00:74:7E (241.0.116.126) for PXELINUX to
-	  recognize any special DHCP options whatsoever.  As of
-	  PXELINUX 3.55, this option is deprecated and is no longer
-	  required.
-
-Option 209	pxelinux.configfile
-	- Specifies the PXELINUX configuration file name.
-
-Option 210	pxelinux.pathprefix
-	- Specifies the PXELINUX common path prefix, instead of
-	  deriving it from the boot file name.  This almost certainly
-	  needs to end in whatever character the TFTP server OS uses
-	  as a pathname separator, e.g. slash (/) for Unix.
-
-Option 211	pxelinux.reboottime
-	- Specifies, in seconds, the time to wait before reboot in the
-	  event of TFTP failure.  0 means wait "forever" (in reality,
-	  it waits approximately 136 years.)
-
-ISC dhcp 3.0 supports a rather nice syntax for specifying custom
-options; you can use the following syntax in dhcpd.conf if you are
-running this version of dhcpd:
-
-	option space pxelinux;
-	option pxelinux.magic      code 208 = string;
-	option pxelinux.configfile code 209 = text;
-	option pxelinux.pathprefix code 210 = text;
-	option pxelinux.reboottime code 211 = unsigned integer 32;
-
-    NOTE: In earlier versions of PXELINUX, this would only work as a
-    "site-option-space".  Since PXELINUX 2.07, this will work both as a
-    "site-option-space" (unencapsulated) and as a "vendor-option-space"
-    (type 43 encapsulated.)  This may avoid messing with the
-    dhcp-parameter-request-list, as detailed below.
-
-Then, inside your PXELINUX-booting group or class (whereever you have
-the PXELINUX-related options, such as the filename option), you can
-add, for example:
-
-	# Always include the following lines for all PXELINUX clients
-	site-option-space "pxelinux";
-	option pxelinux.magic f1:00:74:7e;
-	if exists dhcp-parameter-request-list {
-		# Always send the PXELINUX options (specified in hexadecimal)
-		option dhcp-parameter-request-list = concat(option dhcp-parameter-request-list,d0,d1,d2,d3);
-	}
-	# These lines should be customized to your setup
-	option pxelinux.configfile "configs/common";
-	option pxelinux.pathprefix "/tftpboot/pxelinux/files/";
-	option pxelinux.reboottime 30;
-	filename "/tftpboot/pxelinux/pxelinux.bin";
-
-Note that the configfile is relative to the pathprefix: this will look
-for a config file called /tftpboot/pxelinux/files/configs/common on
-the TFTP server.
-
-The "option dhcp-parameter-request-list" statement forces the DHCP
-server to send the PXELINUX-specific options, even though they are not
-explicitly requested.  Since the DHCP request is done before PXELINUX
-is loaded, the PXE client won't know to request them.
-
-Using ISC dhcp 3.0 you can create a lot of these strings on the fly.
-For example, to use the hexadecimal form of the hardware address as
-the configuration file name, you could do something like:
-
-	site-option-space "pxelinux";
-	option pxelinux.magic f1:00:74:7e;
-	if exists dhcp-parameter-request-list {
-		# Always send the PXELINUX options (specified in hexadecimal)
-		option dhcp-parameter-request-list = concat(option dhcp-parameter-request-list,d0,d1,d2,d3);
-	}
-	option pxelinux.configfile =
-		concat("pxelinux.cfg/", binary-to-ascii(16, 8, ":", hardware));
-	filename "/tftpboot/pxelinux.bin";
-
-If you used this from a client whose Ethernet address was
-58:FA:84:CF:55:0E, this would look for a configuration file named
-"/tftpboot/pxelinux.cfg/1:58:fa:84:cf:55:e".
-
-
-    ++++ ALTERNATE TFTP SERVERS ++++
-
-PXELINUX supports the following special pathname conventions:
-
-::filename
-
-	Suppresses the common filename prefix, i.e. passes the string
-	"filename" unmodified to the server.
-
-IP address::filename		(e.g. 192.0.2.1::filename)
-
-	Suppresses the common filename prefix, *and* sends a request
-	to an alternate TFTP server.  Instead of an IP address, a
-	DNS name can be used.  It will be assumed to be fully
-	qualified if it contains dots; otherwise the local domain as
-	reported by the DHCP server (option 15) will be added.
-
-:: was chosen because it is unlikely to conflict with operating system
-usage.  However, if you happen to have an environment for which the
-special treatment of :: is a problem, please contact the Syslinux
-mailing list.
-
-
-    ++++ SOME NOTES ++++
-
-If the boot fails, PXELINUX (unlike SYSLINUX) will not wait forever;
-rather, if it has not received any input for approximately five
-minutes after displaying an error message, it will reset the machine.
-This allows an unattended machine to recover in case it had bad enough
-luck of trying to boot at the same time the TFTP server goes down.
-
-Lots of PXE stacks, especially old ones, have various problems of
-varying degrees of severity.  Please see:
-
-	http://syslinux.zytor.com/hardware.php
-
-... for a list of currently known hardware problems, with workarounds
-if known.
-
-
-    ++++ KEEPING THE PXE STACK AROUND ++++
-
-Normally, PXELINUX will unload the PXE and UNDI stacks before invoking
-the kernel.  In special circumstances (for example, when using MEMDISK
-to boot an operating system with an UNDI network driver) it might be
-desirable to keep the PXE stack in memory.  If the option "keeppxe"
-is given on the kernel command line, PXELINUX will keep the PXE and
-UNDI stacks in memory.  (If you don't know what this means, you
-probably don't need it.)
-
-
-    ++++ PROBLEMS WITH YOUR PXE STACK ++++
-
-There are a number of extremely broken PXE stacks in the field.  The
-gPXE project (formerly known as Etherboot) provides an open-source PXE
-stack that works with a number of cards, and which can be loaded from
-a CD-ROM, USB key, or floppy if desired.
-
-Information on gPXE is available from:
-
-	http://www.etherboot.org/
-
-... and ready-to-use ROM or disk images from:
-
-	http://www.rom-o-matic.net/
-
-Some cards, like may systems with the SiS 900, has a PXE stack which
-works just barely well enough to load a single file, but doesn't
-handle the more advanced items required by PXELINUX.  If so, it is
-possible to use the built-in PXE stack to load gPXE, which can then
-load PXELINUX.  See:
-
-	http://www.etherboot.org/wiki/pxechaining
-
-
-    ++++ CURRENTLY KNOWN PROBLEMS ++++
-
-The following problems are known with PXELINUX, so far:
-
-+ The error recovery routine doesn't work quite right.  For right now,
-  it just does a hard reset - seems good enough.
-+ We should probably call the UDP receive function in the keyboard
-  entry loop, so that we answer ARP requests.
-+ Boot sectors/disk images are not supported yet.
-
-If you have additional problems, please contact the Syslinux mailing
-list (see syslinux.txt for the address.)

config/release/3rdparty/syslinux/doc/rfc5071.txt

@@ -1,787 +0,0 @@
-
-
-
-
-
-
-Network Working Group                                         D. Hankins
-Request for Comments: 5071                                           ISC
-Category: Informational                                    December 2007
-
-
-      Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Options Used by PXELINUX
-
-Status of This Memo
-
-   This memo provides information for the Internet community.  It does
-   not specify an Internet standard of any kind.  Distribution of this
-   memo is unlimited.
-
-Abstract
-
-   This document describes the use by PXELINUX of some DHCP Option Codes
-   numbering from 208-211.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-Hankins                      Informational                      [Page 1]
-
-RFC 5071                    PXELINUX Options               December 2007
-
-
-Table of Contents
-
-   1.  Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3
-   2.  Terminology  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4
-   3.  MAGIC Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4
-     3.1.  Description  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4
-     3.2.  Packet Format  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5
-     3.3.  Applicability  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5
-     3.4.  Response to RFC 3942 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5
-   4.  Configuration File Option  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5
-     4.1.  Description  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5
-     4.2.  Packet Format  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  6
-     4.3.  Applicability  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  6
-     4.4.  Response to RFC 3942 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  6
-     4.5.  Client and Server Behaviour  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  6
-   5.  Path Prefix Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  7
-     5.1.  Description  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  7
-     5.2.  Packet Format  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  7
-     5.3.  Applicability  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  7
-     5.4.  Response to RFC 3942 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  8
-     5.5.  Client and Server Behaviour  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  8
-   6.  Reboot Time Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  9
-     6.1.  Description  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  9
-     6.2.  Packet Format  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  9
-     6.3.  Applicability  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
-     6.4.  Response to RFC 3942 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
-     6.5.  Client and Server Behaviour  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
-   7.  Specification Conformance  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
-   8.  Security Considerations  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
-   9.  IANA Considerations  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
-   10. Acknowledgements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
-   11. References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
-     11.1. Normative References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
-     11.2. Informative References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-Hankins                      Informational                      [Page 2]
-
-RFC 5071                    PXELINUX Options               December 2007
-
-
-1.  Introduction
-
-   PXE, the Preboot eXecution Environment, is a first-stage network
-   bootstrap agent.  PXE is loaded out of firmware on the client host,
-   and performs DHCP [3] queries to obtain an IP address.
-
-   Once on the network, it loads a second-stage bootstrap agent as
-   configured by DHCP header and option contents.
-
-   PXELINUX is one such second-stage bootstrap agent.  Once PXE has
-   passed execution to it, PXELINUX seeks its configuration from a cache
-   of DHCP options supplied to the PXE first-stage agent, and then takes
-   action based upon those options.
-
-   Most frequently, this implies loading via Trivial File Transfer
-   Protocol (TFTP) [6] one or more images that are decompressed into
-   memory, then executed to pass execution to the final Host Operating
-   System.
-
-   PXELINUX uses DHCP options 208-211 to govern parts of this bootstrap
-   process, but these options are not requested by the PXE DHCP client
-   at the time it acquires its lease.  At that time, the PXE bootloader
-   has no knowledge that PXELINUX is going to be in use, and even so,
-   would have no way to know what option(s) PXELINUX might digest.
-   Local installations that serve this PXELINUX image to its clients
-   must also configure their DHCP servers to provide these options even
-   though they are not on the DHCP Parameter Request List [4].
-
-   These options are:
-
-   o  "MAGIC" - 208 - An option whose presence and content verifies to
-      the PXELINUX bootloader that the options numbered 209-211 are for
-      the purpose as described herein.
-
-   o  "ConfigFile" - 209 - Configures the path/filename component of the
-      configuration file's location, which this bootloader should use to
-      configure itself.
-
-   o  "PathPrefix" - 210 - Configures a value to be prepended to the
-      ConfigFile to discern the directory location of the file.
-
-   o  "RebootTime" - 211 - Configures a timeout after which the
-      bootstrap program will reboot the system (most likely returning it
-      to PXE).
-
-   Historically, these option codes numbering from 208-211 were
-   designated 'Site Local', but after publication of RFC3942 [8], they
-   were made available for allocation as new standard DHCP options.
-
-
-
-Hankins                      Informational                      [Page 3]
-
-RFC 5071                    PXELINUX Options               December 2007
-
-
-   This document marks these codes as assigned.
-
-   This direct assignment of option code values in the option
-   definitions below is unusual as it is not mentioned in DHCP Option
-   Code assignment guidelines [5].  This document's Option Code
-   assignments are done within RFC 3942's provisions for documenting
-   prior use of option codes within the new range (128-223 inclusive).
-
-2.  Terminology
-
-   o  "first-stage bootloader" - Although a given bootloading order may
-      have many stages, such as where a BIOS boots a DOS Boot Disk,
-      which then loads a PXE executable, it is, in this example, only
-      the PXE executable that this document describes as the "first-
-      stage bootloader" -- in essence, this is the first stage of
-      booting at which DHCP is involved.
-
-   o  "second-stage bootloader" - This describes a program loaded by the
-      first-stage bootloader at the behest of the DHCP server.
-
-   o  "bootloader" and "network bootstrap agent" - These are synonyms,
-      excepting that "bootloader" is intentionally vague in that its
-      next form of bootstrapping may not in fact involve network
-      resources.
-
-   The key words "MAY", "MUST", "MUST NOT", "SHOULD", and "SHOULD NOT"
-   in this document are to be interpreted as described in RFC 2119 [2].
-
-3.  MAGIC Option
-
-3.1.  Description
-
-   If this option is provided to the PXE bootloader, then the value is
-   checked by PXELINUX to match the octet string f1:00:74:7e.  If this
-   matches, then PXELINUX bootloaders will also consume options 209-211,
-   as described below.  Otherwise, they are ignored.
-
-   This measure was intended to ensure that, as the 'Site Local' option
-   space is not allocated from a central authority, no conflict would
-   result in a PXELINUX bootloader improperly digesting options intended
-   for another purpose.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-Hankins                      Informational                      [Page 4]
-
-RFC 5071                    PXELINUX Options               December 2007
-
-
-3.2.  Packet Format
-
-   The MAGIC Option format is as follows:
-
-              Code    Length     m1       m2       m3       m4
-           +--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+
-           |   208  |    4   |  0xF1  |  0x00  |  0x74  |  0x7E  |
-           +--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+
-
-   The code for this option is 208.  The length is always four.
-
-3.3.  Applicability
-
-   This option is absolutely inapplicable to any other purpose.
-
-3.4.  Response to RFC 3942
-
-   The option code 208 will be adopted for this purpose and immediately
-   deprecated.  Future standards action may return this option to an
-   available status should it be necessary.
-
-   A collision of the use of this option is harmless (at least from
-   PXELINUX' point of view) by design: if it does not match the
-   aforementioned magic value, the PXELINUX bootloader will take no
-   special action.
-
-   The PXELINUX project will deprecate the use of this option; future
-   versions of the software will not evaluate its contents.
-
-   It is reasonable to utilize this option code for another purpose, but
-   it is recommended to do this at a later time, given the desire to
-   avoid potential collisions in legacy user bases.
-
-4.  Configuration File Option
-
-4.1.  Description
-
-   Once the PXELINUX executable has been entered from the PXE
-   bootloader, it evaluates this option and loads a file of that name
-   via TFTP.  The contents of this file serve to configure PXELINUX in
-   its next stage of bootloading (specifying boot image names,
-   locations, boot-time flags, text to present the user in menu
-   selections, etc).
-
-   In the absence of this option, the PXELINUX agent will search the
-   TFTP server (as determined by PXE prior to this stage) for a config
-   file of several default names.
-
-
-
-
-Hankins                      Informational                      [Page 5]
-
-RFC 5071                    PXELINUX Options               December 2007
-
-
-4.2.  Packet Format
-
-   The Configuration File Option format is as follows:
-
-              Code    Length    Config-file...
-           +--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+
-           |   209  |    n   |   c1   |   c2   |   ...  |   c(n) |
-           +--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+
-
-   The code for this option is 209.  The Config-file (c1..c(n)) is an
-   NVT-ASCII [1] printable string; it is not terminated by a zero or any
-   other value.
-
-4.3.  Applicability
-
-   Any bootloader, PXE or otherwise, that makes use of a separate
-   configuration file rather than containing all configurations within
-   DHCP options (which may be impossible due to the limited space
-   available for DHCP options) may conceivably make use of this option.
-
-4.4.  Response to RFC 3942
-
-   The code 209 will be adopted for this purpose.
-
-4.5.  Client and Server Behaviour
-
-   The Config File Option MUST be supplied by the DHCP server if it
-   appears on the Parameter Request List, but MUST also be supplied if
-   the server administrator believed it would later be useful to the
-   client (such as because the server is configured to offer a second-
-   stage boot image, which they know will make use of it).  The option
-   MUST NOT be supplied if no value has been configured for it, or if a
-   value of zero length has been configured.
-
-   The DHCP client MUST only cache this option in a location the second-
-   stage bootloader may access.
-
-   The second-stage bootloader MUST, in concert with other DHCP options
-   and fields, use this option's value as a filename to be loaded via
-   TFTP and read for further second-stage-loader-specific configuration
-   parameters.  The format and content of such a file is specific to the
-   second-stage bootloader, and as such, is out of scope of this
-   document.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-Hankins                      Informational                      [Page 6]
-
-RFC 5071                    PXELINUX Options               December 2007
-
-
-5.  Path Prefix Option
-
-5.1.  Description
-
-   In PXELINUX' case, it is often the case that several different
-   environments would have the same TFTP path prefix, but would have
-   different filenames (for example: hosts' bootloader images and config
-   files may be kept in a directory structure derived from their Media
-   Access Control (MAC) address).  Consequently, it was deemed
-   worthwhile to deliver a TFTP path prefix configuration option, so
-   that these two things could be configured separately in a DHCP Server
-   configuration: the prefix and the possibly host-specific file
-   location.
-
-   The actual filename that PXELINUX requests from its TFTP server is
-   derived by prepending this value to the Config File Option above.
-   Once this config file is loaded and during processing, any TFTP file
-   paths specified within it are similarly processed -- prepending the
-   contents of this option.
-
-5.2.  Packet Format
-
-   The Path Prefix Option format is as follows:
-
-              Code    Length   Path-Prefix...
-           +--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+
-           |   210  |    n   |   p1   |   p2   |   ...  |   p(n) |
-           +--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+
-
-   The code for this option is 210.  The Path Prefix is an NVT-ASCII
-   printable string; it is not terminated by zero or any other value.
-
-5.3.  Applicability
-
-   This option came into existence because server administrators found
-   it useful to configure the prefix and suffix of the config file path
-   separately.  A group of different PXE booting clients may use the
-   same path prefix, but different filenames, or vice versa.
-
-   The 'shortcut' this represents is worthwhile, but it is questionable
-   whether that needs to manifest itself on the protocol wire.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-Hankins                      Informational                      [Page 7]
-
-RFC 5071                    PXELINUX Options               December 2007
-
-
-   It only becomes interesting from a protocol standpoint if other
-   options are adopted that prefix this value as well -- performing a
-   kind of string compression is highly beneficial to the limited
-   available DHCP option space.
-
-   But it's clearly inapplicable to any current use of, e.g., the
-   FILENAME header contents or the DHCP Boot File Name option (#67).
-   Use of these fields is encoded on firmware of thousands of devices
-   that can't or are not likely to be upgraded.  Altering any behaviour
-   here is likely to cause severe compatibility problems.
-
-   Although compression of the TFTP-loaded configuration file contents
-   is not a compelling factor, contrived configurations using these
-   values may also exist: where each of a large variety of different
-   clients load the same configuration file, with the same contents, but
-   due to a differently configured path prefix actually load different
-   images.  Whether this sort of use is truly needed remains unproven.
-
-5.4.  Response to RFC 3942
-
-   The code 210 will be adopted for this purpose.
-
-5.5.  Client and Server Behaviour
-
-   The Path Prefix option MUST be supplied by the DHCP server if it
-   appears on the Parameter Request List, but MUST also be supplied if
-   the server administrator believed it would later be useful to the
-   client (such as because the server is configured to offer a second-
-   stage boot image that they know will make use of it).  The option
-   MUST NOT be supplied if no value has been configured for it, or if a
-   value of zero length has been configured.
-
-   The DHCP client MUST only cache this option in a location where the
-   second-stage bootloader may access it.
-
-   The second-stage bootloader MUST prepend this option's value, if any,
-   to the contents of the ConfigFile option prior to obtaining the
-   resulting value via TFTP, or the default 'Config File Search Path',
-   which the second-stage bootloader iterates in the absence of a Config
-   File Option.  The client MAY prepend the value to other configuration
-   directives within that file once it has been loaded.  The client MUST
-   NOT prepend this option's value to any other DHCP option contents or
-   field, unless explicitly stated in a document describing that option
-   or field.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-Hankins                      Informational                      [Page 8]
-
-RFC 5071                    PXELINUX Options               December 2007
-
-
-6.  Reboot Time Option
-
-6.1.  Description
-
-   Should PXELINUX be executed, and then for some reason, be unable to
-   reach its TFTP server to continue bootstrapping, the client will, by
-   default, reboot itself after 300 seconds have passed.  This may be
-   too long, too short, or inappropriate behaviour entirely, depending
-   on the environment.
-
-   By configuring a non-zero value in this option, admins can inform
-   PXELINUX of which specific timeout is desired.  The client will
-   reboot itself if it fails to achieve its configured network resources
-   within the specified number of seconds.
-
-   This reboot will run through the system's normal boot-time execution
-   path, most likely leading it back to PXE and therefore PXELINUX.  So,
-   in the general case, this is akin to returning the client to the DHCP
-   INIT state.
-
-   By configuring zero, the feature is disabled, and instead the client
-   chooses to remove itself from the network and wait indefinitely for
-   operator intervention.
-
-   It should be stressed that this is in no way related to configuring a
-   lease time.  The perceived transition to INIT state is due to client
-   running state -- reinitializing itself -- not due to lease timer
-   activity.  That is, it is not safe to assume that a PXELINUX client
-   will abandon its lease when this timer expires.
-
-6.2.  Packet Format
-
-   The Reboot Time Option format is as follows:
-
-              Code    Length
-           +--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+
-           |   211  |    4   |            Reboot Time            |
-           +--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+
-
-   The code for this option is 211.  The length is always four.  The
-   Reboot Time is a 32-bit (4 byte) integer in network byte order.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-Hankins                      Informational                      [Page 9]
-
-RFC 5071                    PXELINUX Options               December 2007
-
-
-6.3.  Applicability
-
-   Any network bootstrap program in any sufficiently complex networking
-   environment could conceivably enter into such a similar condition,
-   either due to having its IP address stolen out from under it by a
-   rogue client on the network, by being moved between networks where
-   its PXE-derived DHCP lease is no longer valid, or any similar means.
-
-   It seems desirable for any network bootstrap agent to implement an
-   ultimate timeout for it to start over.
-
-   The client may, for example, get different working configuration
-   parameters from a different DHCP server upon restarting.
-
-6.4.  Response to RFC 3942
-
-   The code 211 will be adopted for this purpose.
-
-6.5.  Client and Server Behaviour
-
-   The Reboot Time Option MUST be supplied by the DHCP server if it
-   appears on the Parameter Request List, but MUST also be supplied if
-   the server administrator believed it would later be useful to the
-   client (such as because the server is configured to offer a second-
-   stage boot image that they know will make use of it).  The option
-   MUST NOT be supplied if no value has been configured for it, or if it
-   contains a value of zero length.
-
-   The DHCP client MUST only cache this option in a location the second-
-   stage bootloader may access.
-
-   If the value of this option is nonzero, the second-stage bootloader
-   MUST schedule a timeout: after a number of seconds equal to this
-   option's value have passed, the second-stage bootloader MUST reboot
-   the system, ultimately returning the path of execution back to the
-   first-stage bootloader.  It MUST NOT reboot the system once the
-   thread of execution has been passed to the host operating system (at
-   which point, this timeout is effectively obviated).
-
-   If the value of this option is zero, the second-stage bootloader MUST
-   NOT schedule such a timeout at all.  Any second-stage bootloader that
-   finds it has encountered excessive timeouts attempting to obtain its
-   host operating system SHOULD disconnect itself from the network to
-   wait for operator intervention, but MAY continue to attempt to
-   acquire the host operating system indefinitely.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-Hankins                      Informational                     [Page 10]
-
-RFC 5071                    PXELINUX Options               December 2007
-
-
-7.  Specification Conformance
-
-   To conform to this specification, clients and servers MUST implement
-   the Configuration File, Path Prefix, and Reboot Time options as
-   directed.
-
-   The MAGIC option MAY NOT be implemented, as it has been deprecated.
-
-8.  Security Considerations
-
-   PXE and PXELINUX allow any entity acting as a DHCP server to execute
-   arbitrary code upon a system.  At present, no PXE implementation is
-   known to implement authentication mechanisms [7] so that PXE clients
-   can be sure they are receiving configuration information from the
-   correct, authoritative DHCP server.
-
-   The use of TFTP by PXE and PXELINUX also lacks any form of
-   cryptographic signature -- so a 'Man in the Middle' attack may lead
-   to an attacker's code being executed on the client system.  Since
-   this is not an encrypted channel, any of the TFTP loaded data may
-   also be exposed (such as in loading a "RAMDISK" image, which contains
-   /etc/passwd or similar information).
-
-   The use of the Ethernet MAC Address as the client's unique identity
-   may allow an attacker who takes on that identity to gain
-   inappropriate access to a client system's network resources by being
-   given by the DHCP server whatever 'keys' are required, in fact, to be
-   the target system (to boot up as though it were the target).
-
-   Great care should be taken to secure PXE and PXELINUX installations,
-   such as by using IP firewalls, to reduce or eliminate these concerns.
-
-   A nearby attacker might feed a "Reboot Time" option value of 1 second
-   to a mass of unsuspecting clients, to effect a Denial Of Service
-   (DoS) upon the DHCP server, but then again it may just as easily
-   supply these clients with rogue second-stage bootloaders that simply
-   transmit a flood of packets.
-
-   This document in and by itself provides no security, nor does it
-   impact existing DCHP security as described in RFC 2131 [3].
-
-9.  IANA Considerations
-
-   IANA has done the following:
-
-   1.  Moved DHCPv4 Option code 208 from 'Tentatively Assigned' to
-       'Assigned', referencing this document.  IANA has marked this same
-       option code, 208, as Deprecated.
-
-
-
-Hankins                      Informational                     [Page 11]
-
-RFC 5071                    PXELINUX Options               December 2007
-
-
-   2.  Moved DHCPv4 Option code 209 from 'Tentatively Assigned' to
-       'Assigned', referencing this document.
-
-   3.  Moved DHCPv4 Option code 210 from 'Tentatively Assigned' to
-       'Assigned', referencing this document.
-
-   4.  Moved DHCPv4 Option code 211 from 'Tentatively Assigned' to
-       'Assigned', referencing this document.
-
-10.  Acknowledgements
-
-   These options were designed and implemented for the PXELINUX project
-   by H. Peter Anvin, and he was instrumental in producing this
-   document.  Shane Kerr has also provided feedback that has improved
-   this document.
-
-11.  References
-
-11.1.  Normative References
-
-   [1]  Postel, J. and J. Reynolds, "Telnet Protocol Specification",
-        STD 8, RFC 854, May 1983.
-
-   [2]  Bradner, S., "Key words for use in RFCs to Indicate Requirement
-        Levels", BCP 14, RFC 2119, March 1997.
-
-   [3]  Droms, R., "Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol", RFC 2131,
-        March 1997.
-
-   [4]  Alexander, S. and R. Droms, "DHCP Options and BOOTP Vendor
-        Extensions", RFC 2132, March 1997.
-
-   [5]  Droms, R., "Procedures and IANA Guidelines for Definition of New
-        DHCP Options and Message Types", BCP 43, RFC 2939,
-        September 2000.
-
-11.2.  Informative References
-
-   [6]  Sollins, K., "The TFTP Protocol (Revision 2)", STD 33, RFC 1350,
-        July 1992.
-
-   [7]  Droms, R. and W. Arbaugh, "Authentication for DHCP Messages",
-        RFC 3118, June 2001.
-
-   [8]  Volz, B., "Reclassifying Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
-        version 4 (DHCPv4) Options", RFC 3942, November 2004.
-
-
-
-
-
-Hankins                      Informational                     [Page 12]
-
-RFC 5071                    PXELINUX Options               December 2007
-
-
-Author's Address
-
-   David W. Hankins
-   Internet Systems Consortium, Inc.
-   950 Charter Street
-   Redwood City, CA  94063
-   US
-
-   Phone: +1 650 423 1307
-   EMail: David_Hankins@isc.org
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-Hankins                      Informational                     [Page 13]
-
-RFC 5071                    PXELINUX Options               December 2007
-
-
-Full Copyright Statement
-
-   Copyright (C) The IETF Trust (2007).
-
-   This document is subject to the rights, licenses and restrictions
-   contained in BCP 78, and except as set forth therein, the authors
-   retain all their rights.
-
-   This document and the information contained herein are provided on an
-   "AS IS" basis and THE CONTRIBUTOR, THE ORGANIZATION HE/SHE REPRESENTS
-   OR IS SPONSORED BY (IF ANY), THE INTERNET SOCIETY, THE IETF TRUST AND
-   THE INTERNET ENGINEERING TASK FORCE DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS
-   OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTY THAT THE USE OF
-   THE INFORMATION HEREIN WILL NOT INFRINGE ANY RIGHTS OR ANY IMPLIED
-   WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-
-Intellectual Property
-
-   The IETF takes no position regarding the validity or scope of any
-   Intellectual Property Rights or other rights that might be claimed to
-   pertain to the implementation or use of the technology described in
-   this document or the extent to which any license under such rights
-   might or might not be available; nor does it represent that it has
-   made any independent effort to identify any such rights.  Information
-   on the procedures with respect to rights in RFC documents can be
-   found in BCP 78 and BCP 79.
-
-   Copies of IPR disclosures made to the IETF Secretariat and any
-   assurances of licenses to be made available, or the result of an
-   attempt made to obtain a general license or permission for the use of
-   such proprietary rights by implementers or users of this
-   specification can be obtained from the IETF on-line IPR repository at
-   http://www.ietf.org/ipr.
-
-   The IETF invites any interested party to bring to its attention any
-   copyrights, patents or patent applications, or other proprietary
-   rights that may cover technology that may be required to implement
-   this standard.  Please address the information to the IETF at
-   ietf-ipr@ietf.org.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-Hankins                      Informational                     [Page 14]
-

config/release/3rdparty/syslinux/doc/sdi.txt

@@ -1,149 +0,0 @@
-		       SDI files
-
-
-Syslinux supports SDI files ( *.sdi ).
-
-Features:
- * Support for gzipped SDI images
- * When used with gpxelinux.0, images can be downloaded by HTTP or FTP,
-   leading to fastest boot times.
-
-"System Deployment Image" is a file format created by Microsoft and mostly used
-in its products to provide in a single file a boot loader, an OS loader
-(like NTLDR) and a disk or partition image to boot from it without any
-other installed program. This is typically used in a PXE environment to boot
-embedded Windows versions without boot disk support.
-
-The support of SDI images in Syslinux is based on a white
-paper from Saad Syed. You can find the paper here:
-
-http://msdn.microsoft.com/library/default.asp?url=/library/en-us/dnxpesp1/html/ram_sdi.asp
-
-SDI support has been only been tested with SDI v1.0 with Windows XP Embedded
-images and may not work with later versions or alternative uses.
-
-
-   ++++ Supported SDI images ++++
-
-To make a SDI image supported by pxelinux/isolinux/syslinux, you need to
-follow the steps below (detailed instructions are in the white paper
-cited above):
-
-You need to install "Windows Embedded Studio" and to run the
-"Remote Boot Service Setup".
-
-1) Create a new SDI file (eg: sdimgr /new xpe.sdi).
-
-2) Before importing your target partition, add the following files
-in the root folder:
-	* ntdetect.com
-	* boot.ini
-	Its content should be:
-		[boot loader]
-		  default=ramdisk(0)\WINDOWS
-		  [operating systems]
-		  ramdisk(0)\WINDOWS="Windows XPE  From RAM" /fastdetect
-(you can customize the name and add options like /debug)
-
-Note: Your partition may be compressed (using compressed NTFS), but these two
-files need to be uncompressed.
-
-3) Import the partition in the SDI file (eg: sdimgr xpe.sdi /readpart:D:).
-The size of the partition must be less than 500 MB.
-
-4) Import the boot program STARTROM.COM
-(eg: sdimgr xpe.sdi /import:BOOT,0,C:\Program Files\Windows Embedded\Remote Boot Service\Downloads\startrom.com)
-
-5) Import the nt loader NTLDR in the SDI file
-(eg: sdimgr xpe.sdi /import:LOAD,0,C:\Program Files\Windows Embedded\Remote Boot Service\Downloads\ntldr)
-
-Note: only the version of NTLDR provided by Remote Boot Service Setup
-and located in this directory has been tested. According to
-"http://skolk.livejournal.com/667.html", "osloader.exe" from retail XP
-can also be used to replace this NTLDR version.
-
-6) Pack the SDI file (eg: sdimgr xpe.sdi /pack)
-
-7) Gzip your image
-If you want to speed the download time, you can gzip the image as it will
-be uncompressed by syslinux during the loading. You can use some programs
-like ntfsclone ("http://www.linux-ntfs.org/doku.php?id=ntfsclone") to
-remove unused blocks from the NTFS filesystem before deploying your image.
-
-8) You are now ready to boot your image.
-Unlike the traditional way of using SDI images (startrom.n12), you don't need
-other files than your SDI image in the tftpboot (for pxelinux), the CD
-(for isolinux), or the hard disk for syslinux.
-
-* You can use the usual options of pxelinux/isolinux/syslinux (config file,
-config path, reboot time...)
-
-For example, a simple configuration with pxelinux:
-/tftpboot/xpe.sdi
-/tftpboot/pxelinux.0
-/tftpboot/pxelinux.cfg/default with the following content:
-
-	DEFAULT 0
-	label 0 [WinXpe]
-		KERNEL sdi.c32
-		APPEND xpe.sdi
-
-
-   ++++ Error messages ++++
-
-* No $SDI signature in file
-        A SDI image should begin by a signature "$SDI", the signature has not
-been found in your file. Perhaps your file is corrupted or has not been created
-correctly. Run sdimgr on it to see if everything is correct.
-
-* No BOOT BLOB in image
-        You have to import a boot program (eg: startrom.com) when you make
-your SDI image (see above). The offset of this program in the SDI file
-is in the SDI header (begining of the file). However, the offset
-found in your SDI file is null.
-You probably forgot to include the boot program. Run the sdimgr program
-and look if you see a line like:
-BOOT 0x00000000.00001000 0x00000000.00005EC2...
-                --------
-                This is the
-                offset and
-                should not
-                be null
-
-* BOOT BLOB is empty
-        See above. The size of your boot program included in the SDI
-is null. You probably imported a corrupted version of startrom.com.
-Run sdimgr and check the size in the following line:
-BOOT 0x00000000.00001000 0x00000000.00005EC2...
-                                    --------
-                                    this is the
-                                    size and
-                                    should not
-                                    be null
-
-* BOOT BLOB extends beyond file
-        You have a BOOT BLOB in your SDI file, but its size is invalid
-because its goes beyond the total image size. Check the tools you used
-to build the image file.
-
-* BOOT BLOB too large for memory
-        Your BOOT BLOB seems correct, however there is not enough memory
-to load it. Increase your RAM or reduce the SDI size. This is a very
-abnormal situation as the BOOT BLOB is usually very small. Your SDI
-file might be corrupted.
-
-* Image too large for memory
-        Your SDI file seems correct, however there is not enough memory
-to load it. Increase your RAM or reduce the SDI size.
-
-* SDI header is corrupted
-        Your SDI file seems correct, but its header contains a checksum
-that is invalid. You most likely have a corrupted SDI file.
-
-
-   ++++ Warning messages ++++
-
-* Warning: unknown SDI version
-You are using a newer version of SDI than the one with which this program
-has been tested. It may not work. Please give feedback and provide your
-SDI version.

config/release/3rdparty/syslinux/doc/syslinux.txt

@@ -1,789 +0,0 @@
-			 The Syslinux Project
-
-		   A suite of bootloaders for Linux
-
-	 Copyright 1994-2010 H. Peter Anvin and contributors
-
-This program is provided under the terms of the GNU General Public
-License, version 2 or, at your option, any later version.  There is no
-warranty, neither expressed nor implied, to the function of this
-program.  Please see the included file COPYING for details.
-
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-      Syslinux now has a home page at http://syslinux.zytor.com/
-
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-The Syslinux suite contains the following boot loaders
-("derivatives"), for their respective boot media:
-
-	SYSLINUX - MS-DOS/Windows FAT filesystem
-	PXELINUX - PXE network booting
-	ISOLINUX - ISO9660 CD-ROM
-	EXTLINUX - Linux ext2/ext3 filesystem
-
-For historical reasons, some of the sections in this document applies
-to the FAT loader (SYSLINUX) only; see pxelinux.txt, isolinux.txt and
-extlinux.txt for what differs in these versions.  The all-caps term
-"SYSLINUX" generally refers to the FAT loader, whereas "Syslinux"
-refers to the project as a whole.
-
-Help with cleaning up the docs would be greatly appreciated.
-
-
-   ++++ Options ++++
-
-These are the options common to all versions of Syslinux:
-
-	-s	Safe, slow, stupid; uses simpler code that boots better
-	-f	Force installing
-	-r	Raid mode.  If boot fails, tell the BIOS to boot the next
-		device in the boot sequence (usually the next hard disk)
-		instead of stopping with an error message.
-		This is useful for RAID-1 booting.
-
-These are only in the Windows version:
-
-	-m	Mbr; install a bootable MBR sector to the beginning of the
-		drive.
-	-a	Active; marks the partition used active (=bootable)
-
-
-   ++++ CREATING A BOOTABLE LINUX FLOPPY +++
-
-In order to create a bootable Linux floppy using SYSLINUX, prepare a
-normal MS-DOS formatted floppy.  Copy one or more Linux kernel files to
-it, then execute the DOS command:
-
-        syslinux [-sfrma][-d directory] a: [bootsecfile]
-
-(or whichever drive letter is appropriate; the [] meaning optional.)
-
-Use "syslinux.com" (in the dos subdirectory of the distribution) for
-plain DOS (MS-DOS, DR-DOS, PC-DOS, FreeDOS...) or Win9x/ME.
-
-Use "syslinux.exe" (in the win32 subdirectory of the distribution) for
-WinNT/2000/XP.
-
-Under Linux, execute the command:
-
-	syslinux [-sfr][-d directory][-o offset] /dev/fd0
-
-(or, again, whichever device is the correct one.)
-
-This will alter the boot sector on the disk and copy a file named
-LDLINUX.SYS into its root directory (or a subdirectory, if the -d
-option is specified.)
-
-The -s option, if given, will install a "safe, slow and stupid"
-version of SYSLINUX.  This version may work on some very buggy BIOSes
-on which SYSLINUX would otherwise fail.  If you find a machine on
-which the -s option is required to make it boot reliably, please send
-as much info about your machine as you can, and include the failure
-mode.
-
-The -o option is used with a disk image file and specifies the byte
-offset of the filesystem image in the file.
-
-For the DOS and Windows installers, the -m and -a options can be used
-on hard drives to write a Master Boot Record (MBR), and to mark the
-specific partition active.
-
-If the Shift or Alt keys are held down during boot, or the Caps or Scroll
-locks are set, Syslinux will display a LILO-style "boot:" prompt.  The
-user can then type a kernel file name followed by any kernel parameters.
-The Syslinux loader does not need to know about the kernel file in
-advance; all that is required is that it is a file located in the root
-directory on the disk.
-
-There are two versions of the Linux installer; one in the "mtools"
-directory which requires no special privilege (other than write
-permission to the device where you are installing) but requires the
-mtools program suite to be available, and one in the "unix" directory
-which requires root privilege.
-
-
-   ++++ CONFIGURATION FILE ++++
-
-All options here apply to PXELINUX, ISOLINUX and EXTLINUX as well as
-SYSLINUX unless otherwise noted.  See the respective .txt files.
-
-All the configurable defaults in SYSLINUX can be changed by putting a
-file called "syslinux.cfg" in the root directory of the boot disk.
-
-Starting with version 3.35, the configuration file can also be in
-either the /boot/syslinux or /syslinux directories (searched in that
-order.)  If that is the case, then all filenames are assumed to be
-relative to that same directory, unless preceded with a slash or
-backslash.
-
-The configuration file is a text file in either UNIX or DOS format,
-containing one or more of the following items, each on its own line with
-optional leading whitespace.  Case is insensitive for keywords; upper
-case is used here to indicate that a word should be typed verbatim.
-
-#comment
-	A comment line.
-
-INCLUDE filename
-	Inserts the contents of another file at this point in the
-	configuration file. Files can currently be nested up to 16
-	levels deep, but it is not guaranteed that more than 8 levels
-	will be supported in the future.
-
-DEFAULT kernel options...
-        Sets the default command line.  If Syslinux boots automatically,
-        it will act just as if the entries after DEFAULT had been typed
-        in at the "boot:" prompt.
-
-	If no configuration file is present, or no DEFAULT entry is
-        present in the config file, an error message is displayed and
-	the boot: prompt is shown.
-
-UI module options...
-	Selects a specific user interface module (typically menu.c32
-	or vesamenu.c32).  The command-line interface treats this as a
-	directive that overrides the DEFAULT and PROMPT directives.
-
-APPEND options...
-        Add one or more options to the kernel command line.  These are
-        added both for automatic and manual boots.  The options are
-        added at the very beginning of the kernel command line,
-        usually permitting explicitly entered kernel options to override
-        them.  This is the equivalent of the LILO "append" option.
-
-IPAPPEND flag_val			[PXELINUX only]
-	The IPAPPEND option is available only on PXELINUX.  The
-	flag_val is an OR of the following options:
-
-	1: indicates that an option of the following format
-	should be generated and added to the kernel command line:
-
-		ip=<client-ip>:<boot-server-ip>:<gw-ip>:<netmask>
-
-	... based on the input from the DHCP/BOOTP or PXE boot server.
-
-	NOTE: The use of this option is no substitute for running a
-	DHCP client in the booted system.  Without regular renewals,
-	the lease acquired by the PXE BIOS will expire, making the
-	IP address available for reuse by the DHCP server.
-
-	2: indicates that an option of the following format
-	should be generated and added to the kernel command line:
-
-		BOOTIF=<hardware-address-of-boot-interface>
-
-	... in dash-separated hexadecimal with leading hardware type
-	(same as for the configuration file; see pxelinux.txt.)
-
-	This allows an initrd program to determine from which
-	interface the system booted.
-
-	4: indicates that an option of the following format
-	should be generated and added to the kernel command line:
-
-		SYSUUID=<system uuid>
-
-	... in lower case hexadecimal in the format normally used for
-	UUIDs (same as for the configuration file; see pxelinux.txt.)
-
-LABEL label
-    KERNEL image
-    APPEND options...
-    IPAPPEND flag_val			[PXELINUX only]
-	Indicates that if "label" is entered as the kernel to boot,
-        Syslinux should instead boot "image", and the specified APPEND
-	and IPAPPEND options should be used instead of the ones
-        specified in the global section of the file (before the first
-        LABEL command.)  The default for "image" is the same as
-        "label", and if no APPEND is given the default is to use the
-        global entry (if any).
-
-	Starting with version 3.62, the number of LABEL statements is
-	virtually unlimited.
-
-        Note that LILO uses the syntax:
-        image = mykernel
-          label = mylabel
-          append = "myoptions"
-
-        ... whereas Syslinux uses the syntax:
-        label mylabel
-          kernel mykernel
-          append myoptions
-
-	Note: The "kernel" doesn't have to be a Linux kernel; it can
-	      be a boot sector or a COMBOOT file (see below.)
-
-	Since version 3.32 label names are no longer mangled into DOS
-	format (for SYSLINUX.)
-
-    The following commands are available after a LABEL statement:
-
-    LINUX image			- Linux kernel image (default)
-    BOOT image			- Bootstrap program (.bs, .bin)
-    BSS image			- BSS image (.bss)
-    PXE image			- PXE Network Bootstrap Program (.0)
-    FDIMAGE image		- Floppy disk image (.img)
-    COMBOOT image		- COMBOOT program (.com, .cbt)
-    COM32 image			- COM32 program (.c32)
-    CONFIG image		- New configuration file
-	Using one of these keywords instead of KERNEL forces the
-	filetype, regardless of the filename.
-
-	CONFIG means restart the boot loader using a different
-	configuration file.
-
-    APPEND -
-        Append nothing.  APPEND with a single hyphen as argument in a
-        LABEL section can be used to override a global APPEND.
-
-    LOCALBOOT type			[ISOLINUX, PXELINUX]
-	On PXELINUX, specifying "LOCALBOOT 0" instead of a "KERNEL"
-	option means invoking this particular label will cause a local
-	disk boot instead of booting a kernel.
-
-	The argument 0 means perform a normal boot.  The argument 4
-	will perform a local boot with the Universal Network Driver
-	Interface (UNDI) driver still resident in memory.  Finally,
-	the argument 5 will perform a local boot with the entire PXE
-	stack, including the UNDI driver, still resident in memory.
-	All other values are undefined.  If you don't know what the
-	UNDI or PXE stacks are, don't worry -- you don't want them,
-	just specify 0.
-
-	On ISOLINUX, the "type" specifies the local drive number to
-	boot from; 0x00 is the primary floppy drive and 0x80 is the
-	primary hard drive.  The special value -1 causes ISOLINUX to
-	report failure to the BIOS, which, on recent BIOSes, should
-	mean that the next boot device in the boot sequence should be
-	activated.
-
-    INITRD initrd_file
-	Starting with version 3.71, an initrd can be specified in a
-	separate statement (INITRD) instead of as part of the APPEND
-	statement; this functionally appends "initrd=initrd_file" to
-	the kernel command line.
-
-	It supports multiple filenames separated by commas.
-	This is mostly useful for initramfs, which can be composed of
-	multiple separate cpio or cpio.gz archives.
-	Note: all files except the last one are zero-padded to a
-	4K page boundary.  This should not affect initramfs.
-
-IMPLICIT flag_val
-        If flag_val is 0, do not load a kernel image unless it has been
-        explicitly named in a LABEL statement.  The default is 1.
-
-ALLOWOPTIONS flag_val
-	If flag_val is 0, the user is not allowed to specify any
-	arguments on the kernel command line.  The only options
-	recognized are those specified in an APPEND statement.  The
-	default is 1.
-
-TIMEOUT timeout
-        Indicates how long to wait at the boot: prompt until booting
-        automatically, in units of 1/10 s.  The timeout is cancelled as
-        soon as the user types anything on the keyboard, the assumption
-        being that the user will complete the command line already
-        begun.  A timeout of zero will disable the timeout completely,
-        this is also the default.
-
-TOTALTIMEOUT timeout
-        Indicates how long to wait until booting automatically, in
-	units of 1/10 s.  This timeout is *not* cancelled by user
-	input, and can thus be used to deal with serial port glitches
-	or "the user walked away" type situations.  A timeout of zero
-	will disable the timeout completely, this is also the default.
-
-	Both TIMEOUT and TOTALTIMEOUT can be used together, for
-	example:
-
-		# Wait 5 seconds unless the user types something, but
-		# always boot after 15 minutes.
-		TIMEOUT 50
-		TOTALTIMEOUT 9000
-
-ONTIMEOUT kernel options...
-	Sets the command line invoked on a timeout.  Normally this is
-	the same thing as invoked by "DEFAULT".  If this is specified,
-	then "DEFAULT" is used only if the user presses <Enter> to
-	boot.
-
-ONERROR kernel options...
-	If a kernel image is not found (either due to it not existing,
-	or because IMPLICIT is set), run the specified command.  The
-	faulty command line is appended to the specified options, so
-	if the ONERROR directive reads as:
-
-		ONERROR xyzzy plugh
-
-	... and the command line as entered by the user is:
-
-		foo bar baz
-
-	... Syslinux will execute the following as if entered by the
-	user:
-
-		xyzzy plugh foo bar baz
-
-SERIAL port [[baudrate] flowcontrol]
-	Enables a serial port to act as the console.  "port" is a
-	number (0 = /dev/ttyS0 = COM1, etc.) or an I/O port address
-	(e.g. 0x3F8); if "baudrate" is omitted, the baud rate defaults
-	to 9600 bps.  The serial parameters are hardcoded to be 8
-	bits, no parity, 1 stop bit.
-
-	"flowcontrol" is a combination of the following bits:
-	0x001 - Assert DTR
-	0x002 - Assert RTS
-	0x008 - Enable interrupts
-	0x010 - Wait for CTS assertion
-	0x020 - Wait for DSR assertion
-	0x040 - Wait for RI assertion
-	0x080 - Wait for DCD assertion
-	0x100 - Ignore input unless CTS asserted
-	0x200 - Ignore input unless DSR asserted
-	0x400 - Ignore input unless RI asserted
-	0x800 - Ignore input unless DCD asserted
-
-	All other bits are reserved.
-
-	Typical values are:
-
-	    0 - No flow control (default)
-	0x303 - Null modem cable detect
-	0x013 - RTS/CTS flow control
-	0x813 - RTS/CTS flow control, modem input
-	0x023 - DTR/DSR flow control
-	0x083 - DTR/DCD flow control
-
-	For the SERIAL directive to be guaranteed to work properly, it
-	should be the first directive in the configuration file.
-
-	NOTE: "port" values from 0 to 3 means the first four serial
-	ports detected by the BIOS.  They may or may not correspond to
-	the legacy port values 0x3F8, 0x2F8, 0x3E8, 0x2E8.
-
-	Enabling interrupts (setting the 0x008 bit) may give better
-	responsiveness without setting the NOHALT option, but could
-	potentially cause problems with buggy BIOSes.
-
-NOHALT flag_val
-	If flag_val is 1, don't halt the processor while idle.
-	Halting the processor while idle significantly reduces the
-	power consumption, but can cause poor responsiveness to the
-	serial console, especially when using scripts to drive the
-	serial console, as opposed to human interaction.
-
-CONSOLE flag_val
-	If flag_val is 0, disable output to the normal video console.
-	If flag_val is 1, enable output to the video console (this is
-	the default.)
-
-	Some BIOSes try to forward this to the serial console and
-	sometimes make a total mess thereof, so this option lets you
-	disable the video console on these systems.
-
-FONT filename
-	Load a font in .psf format before displaying any output
-	(except the copyright line, which is output as ldlinux.sys
-	itself is loaded.)  Syslinux only loads the font onto the
-	video card; if the .psf file contains a Unicode table it is
-	ignored.  This only works on EGA and VGA cards; hopefully it
-	should do nothing on others.
-
-KBDMAP keymap
-	Install a simple keyboard map.  The keyboard remapper used is
-	*very* simplistic (it simply remaps the keycodes received from
-	the BIOS, which means that only the key combinations relevant
-	in the default layout -- usually U.S. English -- can be
-	mapped) but should at least help people with AZERTY keyboard
-	layout and the locations of = and , (two special characters
-	used heavily on the Linux kernel command line.)
-
-	The included program keytab-lilo.pl from the LILO distribution
-	can be used to create such keymaps.  The file keytab-lilo.txt
-	contains the documentation for this program.
-
-DISPLAY filename
-	Displays the indicated file on the screen at boot time (before
-        the boot: prompt, if displayed).  Please see the section below
-        on DISPLAY files.
-
-        NOTE: If the file is missing, this option is simply ignored.
-
-SAY message
-	Prints the message on the screen.
-
-PROMPT flag_val
-        If flag_val is 0, display the boot: prompt only if the Shift or Alt
-        key is pressed, or Caps Lock or Scroll lock is set (this is the
-        default).  If flag_val is 1, always display the boot: prompt.
-
-NOESCAPE flag_val
-	If flag_val is set to 1, ignore the Shift/Alt/Caps Lock/Scroll
-	Lock escapes.  Use this (together with PROMPT 0) to force the
-	default boot alternative.
-
-NOCOMPLETE flag_val
-	If flag_val is set to 1, the Tab key does not display labels
-	at the boot: prompt.
-
-F1 filename
-F2 filename
-   ...etc...
-F9 filename
-F10 filename
-F11 filename
-F12 filename
-        Displays the indicated file on the screen when a function key is
-        pressed at the boot: prompt.  This can be used to implement
-        pre-boot online help (presumably for the kernel command line
-        options.)  Please see the section below on DISPLAY files.
-
-	When using the serial console, press <Ctrl-F><digit> to get to
-	the help screens, e.g. <Ctrl-F><2> to get to the F2 screen.
-	For F10-F12, hit <Ctrl-F><A>, <Ctrl-F>B, <Ctrl-F>C.  For
-	compatibility with earlier versions, F10 can also be entered as
-	<Ctrl-F>0.
-
-Blank lines are ignored.
-
-Note that the configuration file is not completely decoded.  Syntax
-different from the one described above may still work correctly in this
-version of Syslinux, but may break in a future one.
-
-
-   ++++ DISPLAY FILE FORMAT ++++
-
-DISPLAY and function-key help files are text files in either DOS or UNIX
-format (with or without <CR>).  In addition, the following special codes
-are interpreted:
-
-<FF>                                    <FF> = <Ctrl-L> = ASCII 12
-        Clear the screen, home the cursor.  Note that the screen is
-        filled with the current display color.
-
-<SI><bg><fg>                            <SI> = <Ctrl-O> = ASCII 15
-        Set the display colors to the specified background and
-        foreground colors, where <bg> and <fg> are hex digits,
-        corresponding to the standard PC display attributes:
-
-        0 = black               8 = dark grey
-        1 = dark blue           9 = bright blue
-        2 = dark green          a = bright green
-        3 = dark cyan           b = bright cyan
-        4 = dark red            c = bright red
-        5 = dark purple         d = bright purple
-        6 = brown               e = yellow
-        7 = light grey          f = white
-
-        Picking a bright color (8-f) for the background results in the
-        corresponding dark color (0-7), with the foreground flashing.
-
-	Colors are not visible over the serial console.
-
-<CAN>filename<newline>			<CAN> = <Ctrl-X> = ASCII 24
-	If a VGA display is present, enter graphics mode and display
-	the graphic included in the specified file.  The file format
-	is an ad hoc format called LSS16; the included Perl program
-	"ppmtolss16" can be used to produce these images.  This Perl
-	program also includes the file format specification.
-
-	The image is displayed in 640x480 16-color mode.  Once in
-	graphics mode, the display attributes (set by <SI> code
-	sequences) work slightly differently: the background color is
-	ignored, and the foreground colors are the 16 colors specified
-	in the image file.  For that reason, ppmtolss16 allows you to
-	specify that certain colors should be assigned to specific
-	color indicies.
-
-	Color indicies 0 and 7, in particular, should be chosen with
-	care: 0 is the background color, and 7 is the color used for
-	the text printed by Syslinux itself.
-
-<EM>					<EM> = <Ctrl-Y> = ASCII 25
-	If we are currently in graphics mode, return to text mode.
-
-<DLE>..<ETB>				<Ctrl-P>..<Ctrl-W> = ASCII 16-23
-	These codes can be used to select which modes to print a
-	certain part of the message file in.  Each of these control
-	characters select a specific set of modes (text screen,
-	graphics screen, serial port) for which the output is actually
-	displayed:
-
-	Character			Text	Graph	Serial
-	------------------------------------------------------
-	<DLE> = <Ctrl-P> = ASCII 16	No	No	No
-	<DC1> = <Ctrl-Q> = ASCII 17	Yes	No	No
-	<DC2> = <Ctrl-R> = ASCII 18	No	Yes	No
-	<DC3> = <Ctrl-S> = ASCII 19	Yes	Yes	No
-	<DC4> = <Ctrl-T> = ASCII 20	No	No	Yes
-	<NAK> = <Ctrl-U> = ASCII 21	Yes	No	Yes
-	<SYN> = <Ctrl-V> = ASCII 22	No	Yes	Yes
-	<ETB> = <Ctrl-W> = ASCII 23	Yes	Yes	Yes
-
-	For example:
-
-	<DC1>Text mode<DC2>Graphics mode<DC4>Serial port<ETB>
-
-	... will actually print out which mode the console is in!
-
-<SUB>                                   <SUB> = <Ctrl-Z> = ASCII 26
-        End of file (DOS convention).
-
-<BEL>					<BEL> = <Ctrl-G> = ASCII 7
-	Beep the speaker.
-
-
-   ++++ COMMAND LINE KEYSTROKES ++++
-
-The command line prompt supports the following keystrokes:
-
-<Enter>		boot specified command line
-<BackSpace>	erase one character
-<Ctrl-U>	erase the whole line
-<Ctrl-V>	display the current Syslinux version
-<Ctrl-W>	erase one word
-<Ctrl-X>	force text mode
-<Tab>		list matching labels
-<F1>..<F12>	help screens (if configured)
-<Ctrl-F><digit>	equivalent to F1..F10
-<Ctrl-C>	interrupt boot in progress
-<Esc>		interrupt boot in progress
-<Ctrl-N>	display network information (PXELINUX only)
-
-
-   ++++ COMBOOT IMAGES AND OTHER OPERATING SYSTEMS ++++
-
-This version of Syslinux supports chain loading of other operating
-systems (such as MS-DOS and its derivatives, including Windows 95/98),
-as well as COMBOOT-style standalone executables (a subset of DOS .COM
-files; see separate section below.)
-
-Chain loading requires the boot sector of the foreign operating system
-to be stored in a file in the root directory of the filesystem.
-Because neither Linux kernels, boot sector images, nor COMBOOT files
-have reliable magic numbers, Syslinux will look at the file extension.
-The following extensions are recognized (case insensitive):
-
-  none or other	Linux kernel image
-  .0		PXE bootstrap program (NBP) [PXELINUX only]
-  .bin		"CD boot sector" [ISOLINUX only]
-  .bs		Boot sector [SYSLINUX only]
-  .bss		Boot sector, DOS superblock will be patched in [SYSLINUX only]
-  .c32		COM32 image (32-bit COMBOOT)
-  .cbt		COMBOOT image (not runnable from DOS)
-  .com		COMBOOT image (runnable from DOS)
-  .img		Disk image [ISOLINUX only]
-
-For filenames given on the command line, Syslinux will search for the
-file by adding extensions in the order listed above if the plain
-filename is not found.  Filenames in KERNEL statements must be fully
-qualified.
-
-If this is specified with one of the keywords LINUX, BOOT, BSS,
-FDIMAGE, COMBOOT, COM32, or CONFIG instead of KERNEL, the filetype is
-considered to be the one specified regardless of the filename.
-
-
-      ++++ BOOTING DOS (OR OTHER SIMILAR OPERATING SYSTEMS) ++++
-
-This section applies to SYSLINUX only, not to PXELINUX or ISOLINUX.
-See isolinux.txt for an equivalent procedure for ISOLINUX.
-
-This is the recommended procedure for creating a SYSLINUX disk that
-can boot either DOS or Linux.  This example assumes the drive is A: in
-DOS and /dev/fd0 in Linux; for other drives, substitute the
-appropriate drive designator.
-
-   ---- Linux procedure ----
-
-1. Make a DOS bootable disk.  This can be done either by specifying
-   the /s option when formatting the disk in DOS, or by running the
-   DOS command SYS (this can be done under DOSEMU if DOSEMU has
-   direct device access to the relevant drive):
-
-	format a: /s
-   or
-	sys a:
-
-2. Boot Linux.  Copy the DOS boot sector from the disk into a file:
-
-	dd if=/dev/fd0 of=dos.bss bs=512 count=1
-
-3. Run SYSLINUX on the disk:
-
-	syslinux /dev/fd0
-
-4. Mount the disk and copy the DOS boot sector file to it.  The file
-   *must* have extension .bss:
-
-	mount -t msdos /dev/fd0 /mnt
-	cp dos.bss /mnt
-
-5. Copy the Linux kernel image(s), initrd(s), etc to the disk, and
-   create/edit syslinux.cfg and help files if desired:
-
-	cp vmlinux /mnt
-	cp initrd.gz /mnt
-
-6. Unmount the disk (if applicable.)
-
-	umount /mnt
-
-   ---- DOS/Windows procedure ----
-
-To make this installation in DOS only, you need the utility copybs.com
-(included with Syslinux) as well as the syslinux.com installer.  If
-you are on an WinNT-based system (WinNT, Win2k, WinXP or later), use
-syslinux.exe instead.
-
-1. Make a DOS bootable disk.  This can be done either by specifying
-   the /s option when formatting the disk in DOS, or by running the
-   DOS command SYS:
-
-	format a: /s
-   or
-	sys a:
-
-2. Copy the DOS boot sector from the disk into a file.  The file
-   *must* have extension .bss:
-
-	copybs a: a:dos.bss
-
-3. Run SYSLINUX on the disk:
-
-	syslinux a:
-
-4. Copy the Linux kernel image(s), initrd(s), etc to the disk, and
-   create/edit syslinux.cfg and help files if desired:
-
-	copy vmlinux a:
-	copy initrd.gz a:
-
-
-   ++++ COMBOOT EXECUTABLES ++++
-
-Syslinux supports simple standalone programs, using a file format
-similar to DOS ".com" files.  A 32-bit version, called COM32, is also
-provided.  A simple API provides access to a limited set of filesystem
-and console functions.
-
-See the file comboot.txt for more information on COMBOOT and COM32
-programs.
-
-
-   ++++ NOVICE PROTECTION ++++
-
-Syslinux will attempt to detect booting on a machine with too little
-memory, which means the Linux boot sequence cannot complete.  If so, a
-message is displayed and the boot sequence aborted.  Holding down the
-Ctrl key while booting disables this feature.
-
-Any file that SYSLINUX uses can be marked hidden, system or readonly
-if so is convenient; SYSLINUX ignores all file attributes.  The
-SYSLINUX installed automatically sets the readonly/hidden/system
-attributes on LDLINUX.SYS.
-
-
-   ++++ NOTES ON BOOTABLE CD-ROMS ++++
-
-SYSLINUX can be used to create bootdisk images for El
-Torito-compatible bootable CD-ROMs.  However, it appears that many
-BIOSes are very buggy when it comes to booting CD-ROMs.  Some users
-have reported that the following steps are helpful in making a CD-ROM
-that is bootable on the largest possible number of machines:
-
-	a) Use the -s (safe, slow and stupid) option to SYSLINUX;
-	b) Put the boot image as close to the beginning of the
-	   ISO 9660 filesystem as possible.
-
-A CD-ROM is so much faster than a floppy that the -s option shouldn't
-matter from a speed perspective.
-
-Of course, you probably want to use ISOLINUX instead.  See isolinux.txt.
-
-
-   ++++ BOOTING FROM A FAT FILESYSTEM PARTITION ON A HARD DISK ++++
-
-SYSLINUX can boot from a FAT filesystem partition on a hard disk
-(including FAT32).  The installation procedure is identical to the
-procedure for installing it on a floppy, and should work under either
-DOS or Linux.  To boot from a partition, SYSLINUX needs to be launched
-from a Master Boot Record or another boot loader, just like DOS itself
-would.
-
-Under DOS, you can install a standard simple MBR on the primary hard
-disk by running the command:
-
-	FDISK /MBR
-
-Then use the FDISK command to mark the appropriate partition active.
-
-A simple MBR, roughly on par with the one installed by DOS (but
-unencumbered), is included in the SYSLINUX distribution.  To install
-it under Linux, simply type:
-
-	cat mbr.bin > /dev/XXX
-
-... where /dev/XXX is the device you wish to install it on.
-
-Under DOS or Win32, you can install the SYSLINUX MBR with the -m
-option to the SYSLINUX installer, and use the -a option to mark the
-current partition active:
-
-	syslinux -ma c:
-
-Note that this will also install SYSLINUX on the specified partition.
-
-
-   ++++ HARDWARE INFORMATION +++
-
-I have started to maintain a web page of hardware with known
-problems.  There are, unfortunately, lots of broken hardware out
-there; especially early PXE stacks (for PXELINUX) have lots of
-problems.
-
-A list of problems, and workarounds (if known), is maintained at:
-
-	http://syslinux.zytor.com/hardware.php
-
-
-   ++++ BOOT LOADER IDS USED ++++
-
-The Linux boot protocol supports a "boot loader ID", a single byte
-where the upper nybble specifies a boot loader family (3 = Syslinux)
-and the lower nybble is version or, in the case of Syslinux, media:
-
-	0x31 (49) = SYSLINUX
-	0x32 (50) = PXELINUX
-	0x33 (51) = ISOLINUX
-	0x34 (52) = EXTLINUX
-
-In recent versions of Linux, this ID is available as
-/proc/sys/kernel/bootloader_type.
-
-
-   ++++ BUG REPORTS ++++
-
-I would appreciate hearing of any problems you have with Syslinux.  I
-would also like to hear from you if you have successfully used Syslinux,
-*especially* if you are using it for a distribution.
-
-If you are reporting problems, please include all possible information
-about your system and your BIOS; the vast majority of all problems
-reported turn out to be BIOS or hardware bugs, and I need as much
-information as possible in order to diagnose the problems.
-
-There is a mailing list for discussion among Syslinux users and for
-announcements of new and test versions.  To join, or to browse the
-archive, go to:
-
-   http://www.zytor.com/mailman/listinfo/syslinux
-
-Please DO NOT send HTML messages or attachments to the mailing list
-(including multipart/alternative or similar.)  All such messages will
-be bounced.

config/release/3rdparty/syslinux/doc/usbkey.txt

@@ -1,47 +0,0 @@
-The proper mode to boot a USB key drive in is "USB-HDD".  That is the
-ONLY mode in which the C/H/S geometry encoded on the disk itself
-doesn't have to match what the BIOS thinks it is.  Since geometry on
-USB drives is completely arbitrary, and can vary from BIOS to BIOS,
-this is the only mode which will work in general.
-
-Some BIOSes have been reported (in particular, certain versions of the
-Award BIOS) that cannot boot USB keys in "USB-HDD" mode.  This is a
-very serious BIOS bug, but it is unfortunately rather typical of the
-kind of quality we're seeing out of major BIOS vendors these days.  On
-these BIOSes, you're generally stuck booting them in USB-ZIP mode.
-
-THIS MEANS THE FILESYSTEM IMAGE ON THE DISK HAS TO HAVE A CORRECT
-ZIPDRIVE-COMPATIBLE GEOMETRY.
-
-A standard zipdrive (both the 100 MB and the 250 MB varieties) have a
-"geometry" of 64 heads, 32 sectors, and are partitioned devices with a
-single partition 4 (unlike most other media of this type which uses
-partition 1.)  The 100 MB variety has 96 cylinders, and the 250 MB
-variety has 239 cylinders; but any number of cylinders will do as
-appropriate for the size device you have.  For example, if your device
-reports when inserted into a Linux system:
-
-usb-storage: device found at 4
-  Vendor: 32MB      Model: HardDrive         Rev: 1.88
-  Type:   Direct-Access                      ANSI SCSI revision: 02
-SCSI device sda: 64000 512-byte hdwr sectors (33 MB)
-
-... you would have 64000/(64*32) = 31.25 cylinders; round down to 31.
-
-The script "mkdiskimage" which is supplied with the syslinux
-distribution can be used to initialize USB keys in a Zip-like fashion.
-To do that, calculate the correct number of cylinders (31 in the
-example above), and, if your USB key is /dev/sda (CHECK THE KERNEL
-MESSAGES CAREFULLY - IF YOU ENTER THE WRONG DISK DRIVE IT CANNOT BE
-RECOVERED), run:
-
-	mkdiskimage -4 /dev/sda 0 64 32
-
-(The 0 means automatically determine the size of the device, and -4
-means mimic a zipdisk by using partition 4.)
-
-Then you should be able to run
-
-	syslinux /dev/sda4
-
-... and mount /dev/sda4 and put your files on it as needed.

config/version

@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+# VERSION: set full version, use "devel" for development version
+  OPENELEC_VERSION="3.0.5"
+
+# OS_VERSION: OS Version
+  OS_VERSION="3.0"
+
+# ADDON_VERSION: Addon version
+  ADDON_VERSION="3.0"
+

config/vmware/OpenELEC.vmx

@@ -1,55 +0,0 @@
-.encoding = "UTF-8"
-config.version = "8"
-virtualHW.version = "7"
-
-displayName = "OpenELEC.tv - VMWare build"
-guestOS = "other26xlinux"
-nvram = "OpenELEC.nvram"
-numvcpus = "2"
-memsize = "1024"
-mks.enable3d = "TRUE"
-virtualHW.productCompatibility = "hosted"
-
-ide0:0.present = "TRUE"
-ide0:0.fileName = "OpenELEC.flash"
-ide0:1.present = "TRUE"
-ide0:1.fileName = "OpenELEC.storage"
-ide1:0.present = "TRUE"
-ide1:0.autodetect = "TRUE"
-ide1:0.startConnected = "FALSE"
-ide1:0.deviceType = "cdrom-raw"
-ide1:1.present = "FALSE"
-scsi0.present = "FALSE"
-floppy0.present = "FALSE"
-
-ethernet0.present = "TRUE"
-ethernet0.connectionType = "nat"
-ethernet0.wakeOnPcktRcv = "FALSE"
-ethernet0.addressType = "generated"
-
-usb.present = "TRUE"
-ehci.present = "TRUE"
-
-sound.present = "TRUE"
-sound.startConnected = "TRUE"
-sound.fileName = "-1"
-sound.autodetect = "TRUE"
-
-extendedConfigFile = "OpenELEC.vmxf"
-ethernet0.generatedAddress = "00:0c:29:39:05:27"
-uuid.location = "56 4d 6b b5 e7 5c 8d 13-cc 60 70 2d 4f 39 05 27"
-uuid.bios = "56 4d 6b b5 e7 5c 8d 13-cc 60 70 2d 4f 39 05 27"
-cleanShutdown = "TRUE"
-replay.supported = "FALSE"
-replay.filename = ""
-ide0:0.redo = ""
-ide0:1.redo = ""
-usb.pciSlotNumber = "16"
-ethernet0.pciSlotNumber = "17"
-sound.pciSlotNumber = "18"
-ehci.pciSlotNumber = "19"
-vmotion.checkpointFBSize = "134217728"
-ethernet0.generatedAddressOffset = "0"
-debugStub.linuxOffsets = "0x0,0xffffffff,0x0,0x0,0x0,0x0,0x0,0x0,0x0,0x0,0x0,0x0,0x0,0x0"
-tools.remindInstall = "TRUE"
-ide1:0.fileName = "auto detect"

licenses/APSL.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-PPLE PUBLIC SOURCE LICENSE
+APPLE PUBLIC SOURCE LICENSE
 Version 2.0 -  August 6, 2003
 
 Please read this License carefully before downloading this software.  By

licenses/Info-ZIP.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,60 @@
+This is version 2007-Mar-4 of the Info-ZIP license.
+The definitive version of this document should be available at
+ftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/license.html indefinitely and
+a copy at http://www.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/license.html.
+
+
+Copyright (c) 1990-2007 Info-ZIP.  All rights reserved.
+
+For the purposes of this copyright and license, "Info-ZIP" is defined as
+the following set of individuals:
+
+   Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis, Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois,
+   Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley, Ed Gordon, Ian Gorman, Chris Herborth,
+   Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig, Robert Heath, Jonathan Hudson, Paul Kienitz,
+   David Kirschbaum, Johnny Lee, Onno van der Linden, Igor Mandrichenko,
+   Steve P. Miller, Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens, George Petrov, Greg Roelofs,
+   Kai Uwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury, Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda,
+   Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta, Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren,
+   Rich Wales, Mike White.
+
+This software is provided "as is," without warranty of any kind, express
+or implied.  In no event shall Info-ZIP or its contributors be held liable
+for any direct, indirect, incidental, special or consequential damages
+arising out of the use of or inability to use this software.
+
+Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose,
+including commercial applications, and to alter it and redistribute it
+freely, subject to the above disclaimer and the following restrictions:
+
+    1. Redistributions of source code (in whole or in part) must retain
+       the above copyright notice, definition, disclaimer, and this list
+       of conditions.
+
+    2. Redistributions in binary form (compiled executables and libraries)
+       must reproduce the above copyright notice, definition, disclaimer,
+       and this list of conditions in documentation and/or other materials
+       provided with the distribution.  The sole exception to this condition
+       is redistribution of a standard UnZipSFX binary (including SFXWiz) as
+       part of a self-extracting archive; that is permitted without inclusion
+       of this license, as long as the normal SFX banner has not been removed
+       from the binary or disabled.
+
+    3. Altered versions--including, but not limited to, ports to new operating
+       systems, existing ports with new graphical interfaces, versions with
+       modified or added functionality, and dynamic, shared, or static library
+       versions not from Info-ZIP--must be plainly marked as such and must not
+       be misrepresented as being the original source or, if binaries,
+       compiled from the original source.  Such altered versions also must not
+       be misrepresented as being Info-ZIP releases--including, but not
+       limited to, labeling of the altered versions with the names "Info-ZIP"
+       (or any variation thereof, including, but not limited to, different
+       capitalizations), "Pocket UnZip," "WiZ" or "MacZip" without the
+       explicit permission of Info-ZIP.  Such altered versions are further
+       prohibited from misrepresentative use of the Zip-Bugs or Info-ZIP
+       e-mail addresses or the Info-ZIP URL(s), such as to imply Info-ZIP
+       will provide support for the altered versions.
+
+    4. Info-ZIP retains the right to use the names "Info-ZIP," "Zip," "UnZip,"
+       "UnZipSFX," "WiZ," "Pocket UnZip," "Pocket Zip," and "MacZip" for its
+       own source and binary releases.

licenses/OFL1_1.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,102 @@
+Digitized data copyright (c) 2010 Google Corporation
+	with Reserved Font Arimo, Tinos and Cousine.
+Copyright (c) 2012 Red Hat, Inc.
+	with Reserved Font Name Liberation.
+
+This Font Software is licensed under the SIL Open Font License,
+Version 1.1.
+
+This license is copied below, and is also available with a FAQ at:
+http://scripts.sil.org/OFL
+
+SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE Version 1.1 - 26 February 2007
+
+PREAMBLE The goals of the Open Font License (OFL) are to stimulate
+worldwide development of collaborative font projects, to support the font
+creation efforts of academic and linguistic communities, and to provide
+a free and open framework in which fonts may be shared and improved in
+partnership with others.
+
+The OFL allows the licensed fonts to be used, studied, modified and
+redistributed freely as long as they are not sold by themselves.
+The fonts, including any derivative works, can be bundled, embedded,
+redistributed and/or sold with any software provided that any reserved
+names are not used by derivative works.  The fonts and derivatives,
+however, cannot be released under any other type of license.  The
+requirement for fonts to remain under this license does not apply to
+any document created using the fonts or their derivatives.
+
+ 
+
+DEFINITIONS
+"Font Software" refers to the set of files released by the Copyright
+Holder(s) under this license and clearly marked as such.
+This may include source files, build scripts and documentation.
+
+"Reserved Font Name" refers to any names specified as such after the
+copyright statement(s).
+
+"Original Version" refers to the collection of Font Software components
+as distributed by the Copyright Holder(s).
+
+"Modified Version" refers to any derivative made by adding to, deleting,
+or substituting ? in part or in whole ?
+any of the components of the Original Version, by changing formats or
+by porting the Font Software to a new environment.
+
+"Author" refers to any designer, engineer, programmer, technical writer
+or other person who contributed to the Font Software.
+
+
+PERMISSION & CONDITIONS
+
+Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
+copy of the Font Software, to use, study, copy, merge, embed, modify,
+redistribute, and sell modified and unmodified copies of the Font
+Software, subject to the following conditions:
+
+1) Neither the Font Software nor any of its individual components,in
+   Original or Modified Versions, may be sold by itself.
+
+2) Original or Modified Versions of the Font Software may be bundled,
+   redistributed and/or sold with any software, provided that each copy
+   contains the above copyright notice and this license. These can be
+   included either as stand-alone text files, human-readable headers or
+   in the appropriate machine-readable metadata fields within text or
+   binary files as long as those fields can be easily viewed by the user.
+
+3) No Modified Version of the Font Software may use the Reserved Font
+   Name(s) unless explicit written permission is granted by the
+   corresponding Copyright Holder. This restriction only applies to the
+   primary font name as presented to the users.
+
+4) The name(s) of the Copyright Holder(s) or the Author(s) of the Font
+   Software shall not be used to promote, endorse or advertise any
+   Modified Version, except to acknowledge the contribution(s) of the
+   Copyright Holder(s) and the Author(s) or with their explicit written
+   permission.
+
+5) The Font Software, modified or unmodified, in part or in whole, must
+   be distributed entirely under this license, and must not be distributed
+   under any other license. The requirement for fonts to remain under
+   this license does not apply to any document created using the Font
+   Software.
+
+
+ 
+TERMINATION
+This license becomes null and void if any of the above conditions are not met.
+
+ 
+
+DISCLAIMER
+THE FONT SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTIES OF
+MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
+OF COPYRIGHT, PATENT, TRADEMARK, OR OTHER RIGHT.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
+COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
+INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+DAMAGES, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING
+FROM, OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE FONT SOFTWARE OR FROM OTHER
+DEALINGS IN THE FONT SOFTWARE.
+

packages/3rdparty/download/CouchPotato/meta

@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 ################################################################################
 #      This file is part of OpenELEC - http://www.openelec.tv
-#      Copyright (C) 2009-2011 Stephan Raue (stephan@openelec.tv)
+#      Copyright (C) 2009-2012 Stephan Raue (stephan@openelec.tv)
 #      Copyright (C) 2011 Anthony Nash (nash.ant@gmail.com)
 #
 #  This Program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
@@ -15,12 +15,12 @@
 #
 #  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
 #  along with OpenELEC.tv; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to
-#  the Free Software Foundation, 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
+#  the Free Software Foundation, 51 Franklin Street, Suite 500, Boston, MA 02110, USA.
 #  http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html
 ################################################################################
 
 PKG_NAME="CouchPotato"
-PKG_VERSION="4eec8e0"
+PKG_VERSION="806bed6"
 PKG_REV="1"
 PKG_ARCH="any"
 PKG_LICENSE="OSS"

packages/3rdparty/download/CouchPotatoServer/meta

@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+################################################################################
+#      This file is part of OpenELEC - http://www.openelec.tv
+#      Copyright (C) 2009-2012 Stephan Raue (stephan@openelec.tv)
+#      Copyright (C) 2011 Anthony Nash (nash.ant@gmail.com)
+#
+#  This Program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+#  it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+#  the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+#  any later version.
+#
+#  This Program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+#  but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+#  MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+#  GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+#  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+#  along with OpenELEC.tv; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to
+#  the Free Software Foundation, 51 Franklin Street, Suite 500, Boston, MA 02110, USA.
+#  http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html
+################################################################################
+
+PKG_NAME="CouchPotatoServer"
+PKG_VERSION="a49a00a"
+PKG_REV="1"
+PKG_ARCH="any"
+PKG_LICENSE="OSS"
+PKG_SITE="https://github.com/RuudBurger/CouchPotatoServer"
+PKG_URL="$DISTRO_SRC/$PKG_NAME-$PKG_VERSION.tar.xz"
+PKG_DEPENDS="Python SABnzbd"
+PKG_BUILD_DEPENDS="toolchain Python"
+PKG_PRIORITY="optional"
+PKG_SECTION="service/downloadmanager"
+PKG_SHORTDESC="CouchPotatoServer: automated movie downloading."
+PKG_LONGDESC="CouchPotatoServer: automated movie downloading."
+
+PKG_IS_ADDON="no"
+
+PKG_AUTORECONF="no"

packages/3rdparty/download/CouchPotatoServer/patches/CouchPotatoServer-a49a00a-move-cache.patch

@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+diff --git a/couchpotato/runner.py b/couchpotato/runner.py
+index c0b7eb8..3a550f9 100644
+--- a/couchpotato/runner.py
++++ b/couchpotato/runner.py
+@@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ def runCouchPotato(options, base_path, args, data_dir = None, log_dir = None, En
+     Env.set('data_dir', data_dir)
+     Env.set('log_path', os.path.join(log_dir, 'CouchPotato.log'))
+     Env.set('db_path', 'sqlite:///' + db_path)
+-    Env.set('cache_dir', os.path.join(data_dir, 'cache'))
++    Env.set('cache_dir', os.path.join(data_dir, 'cache.cpv2'))
+     Env.set('cache', FileSystemCache(os.path.join(Env.get('cache_dir'), 'python')))
+     Env.set('console_log', options.console_log)
+     Env.set('quiet', options.quiet)

packages/3rdparty/download/Headphones/meta

@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 ################################################################################
 #      This file is part of OpenELEC - http://www.openelec.tv
-#      Copyright (C) 2009-2011 Stephan Raue (stephan@openelec.tv)
+#      Copyright (C) 2009-2012 Stephan Raue (stephan@openelec.tv)
 #      Copyright (C) 2011 Anthony Nash (nash.ant@gmail.com)
 #
 #  This Program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
@@ -15,12 +15,12 @@
 #
 #  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
 #  along with OpenELEC.tv; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to
-#  the Free Software Foundation, 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
+#  the Free Software Foundation, 51 Franklin Street, Suite 500, Boston, MA 02110, USA.
 #  http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html
 ################################################################################
 
 PKG_NAME="Headphones"
-PKG_VERSION="e9a1e55"
+PKG_VERSION="263272c"
 PKG_REV="1"
 PKG_ARCH="any"
 PKG_LICENSE="OSS"

packages/3rdparty/download/SABnzbd/meta

@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 ################################################################################
 #      This file is part of OpenELEC - http://www.openelec.tv
-#      Copyright (C) 2009-2011 Stephan Raue (stephan@openelec.tv)
+#      Copyright (C) 2009-2012 Stephan Raue (stephan@openelec.tv)
 #
 #  This Program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
 #  it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
@@ -14,19 +14,19 @@
 #
 #  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
 #  along with OpenELEC.tv; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to
-#  the Free Software Foundation, 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
+#  the Free Software Foundation, 51 Franklin Street, Suite 500, Boston, MA 02110, USA.
 #  http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html
 ################################################################################
 
 PKG_NAME="SABnzbd"
-PKG_VERSION="0.6.10"
+PKG_VERSION="0.7.11"
 PKG_REV="1"
 PKG_ARCH="any"
 PKG_LICENSE="OSS"
 PKG_SITE="http://sabnzbd.org/"
-PKG_URL="$SOURCEFORGE_SRC/sabnzbdplus/sabnzbdplus/sabnzbd-${PKG_VERSION}/${PKG_NAME}-${PKG_VERSION}-src.tar.gz"
+PKG_URL="$SOURCEFORGE_SRC/sabnzbdplus/sabnzbdplus/${PKG_VERSION}/${PKG_NAME}-${PKG_VERSION}-src.tar.gz"
 PKG_DEPENDS="Python Cheetah pyOpenSSL yenc unrar unzip par2cmdline"
-PKG_BUILD_DEPENDS="toolchain Python Cheetah pyOpenSSL yenc unrar unzip par2cmdline"
+PKG_BUILD_DEPENDS="toolchain Python Cheetah pyOpenSSL yenc unrar unzip par2cmdline configobj"
 PKG_PRIORITY="optional"
 PKG_SECTION="service/downloadmanager"
 PKG_SHORTDESC="SABnzbd makes Usenet as simple and streamlined as possible by automating everything we can."

packages/3rdparty/download/SABnzbd/patches/SABnzbd-0.7.11-001_remove_default_settings-0.3.patch

@@ -1,6 +1,7 @@
-diff -Naur SABnzbd-0.6.4/interfaces/Plush/templates/config_directories.tmpl SABnzbd-0.6.4.patch/interfaces/Plush/templates/config_directories.tmpl
---- SABnzbd-0.6.4/interfaces/Plush/templates/config_directories.tmpl	2011-06-08 00:02:34.000000000 +0200
-+++ SABnzbd-0.6.4.patch/interfaces/Plush/templates/config_directories.tmpl	2011-06-13 16:37:49.027611932 +0200
+diff --git a/interfaces/Plush/templates/config_folders.tmpl b/interfaces/Plush/templates/config_folders.tmpl
+index 92bb5d1..94c1502 100644
+--- a/interfaces/Plush/templates/config_folders.tmpl
++++ b/interfaces/Plush/templates/config_folders.tmpl
 @@ -76,16 +76,6 @@
            <span class="component-desc">$T('explain-dirscan_speed')</span>
          </label>
@@ -68,9 +69,10 @@ diff -Naur SABnzbd-0.6.4/interfaces/Plush/templates/config_directories.tmpl SABn
    <div class="component-group-last clearfix">
      <div class="component-group-desc">
        <h3>&nbsp;</h3>
-diff -Naur SABnzbd-0.6.4/interfaces/Plush/templates/config_general.tmpl SABnzbd-0.6.4.patch/interfaces/Plush/templates/config_general.tmpl
---- SABnzbd-0.6.4/interfaces/Plush/templates/config_general.tmpl	2011-06-08 00:02:34.000000000 +0200
-+++ SABnzbd-0.6.4.patch/interfaces/Plush/templates/config_general.tmpl	2011-06-13 16:35:26.411903234 +0200
+diff --git a/interfaces/Plush/templates/config_general.tmpl b/interfaces/Plush/templates/config_general.tmpl
+index 0c293ec..56f9488 100644
+--- a/interfaces/Plush/templates/config_general.tmpl
++++ b/interfaces/Plush/templates/config_general.tmpl
 @@ -14,82 +14,6 @@
      </div>
      <fieldset class="component-group-list">
@@ -154,7 +156,7 @@ diff -Naur SABnzbd-0.6.4/interfaces/Plush/templates/config_general.tmpl SABnzbd-
          <label class="nocheck clearfix" for="language">
            <span class="component-title">$T('opt-language')</span>
            <select name="language" id="language" id="language" class="select">
-@@ -129,13 +53,6 @@
+@@ -131,13 +55,6 @@
            <span class="component-desc">$T('explain-nzbkey')</span>
          </label>
        </div>
@@ -168,7 +170,7 @@ diff -Naur SABnzbd-0.6.4/interfaces/Plush/templates/config_general.tmpl SABnzbd-
      </fieldset>
    </div><!-- /component-group1 -->
  
-@@ -152,36 +69,6 @@
+@@ -154,36 +71,6 @@
            <span class="component-desc">$T('explain-enable_https')</span>
          </label>
        </div>
@@ -205,9 +207,10 @@ diff -Naur SABnzbd-0.6.4/interfaces/Plush/templates/config_general.tmpl SABnzbd-
      </fieldset>
    </div><!-- /component-group2 -->
  
-diff -Naur SABnzbd-0.6.4/interfaces/Plush/templates/config_switches.tmpl SABnzbd-0.6.4.patch/interfaces/Plush/templates/config_switches.tmpl
---- SABnzbd-0.6.4/interfaces/Plush/templates/config_switches.tmpl	2011-06-08 00:02:34.000000000 +0200
-+++ SABnzbd-0.6.4.patch/interfaces/Plush/templates/config_switches.tmpl	2011-06-13 16:35:26.446903654 +0200
+diff --git a/interfaces/Plush/templates/config_switches.tmpl b/interfaces/Plush/templates/config_switches.tmpl
+index a8f1069..6f50b49 100644
+--- a/interfaces/Plush/templates/config_switches.tmpl
++++ b/interfaces/Plush/templates/config_switches.tmpl
 @@ -12,20 +12,6 @@
        <h3>$T('swtag-general')</h3>
      </div>

packages/3rdparty/download/SickBeard/meta

@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 ################################################################################
 #      This file is part of OpenELEC - http://www.openelec.tv
-#      Copyright (C) 2009-2011 Stephan Raue (stephan@openelec.tv)
+#      Copyright (C) 2009-2012 Stephan Raue (stephan@openelec.tv)
 #      Copyright (C) 2011 Anthony Nash (nash.ant@gmail.com)
 #
 #  This Program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
@@ -15,12 +15,12 @@
 #
 #  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
 #  along with OpenELEC.tv; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to
-#  the Free Software Foundation, 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
+#  the Free Software Foundation, 51 Franklin Street, Suite 500, Boston, MA 02110, USA.
 #  http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html
 ################################################################################
 
 PKG_NAME="SickBeard"
-PKG_VERSION="9f64728"
+PKG_VERSION="4e57625"
 PKG_REV="1"
 PKG_ARCH="any"
 PKG_LICENSE="OSS"

packages/3rdparty/download/SickBeard/patches/SickBeard-4e57625-001-remove_logo_update-header_and_donate_button-0.1.patch

@@ -0,0 +1,55 @@
+diff --git a/data/interfaces/default/config.tmpl b/data/interfaces/default/config.tmpl
+index ec28766..fdf3e30 100644
+--- a/data/interfaces/default/config.tmpl
++++ b/data/interfaces/default/config.tmpl
+@@ -36,13 +36,4 @@
+     </table>
+ </div>
+ 
+-<div class="container padding" style="width: 600px;">
+-    <table class="infoTable">
+-        <tr>
+-            <td><a href="https://www.paypal.com/cgi-bin/webscr?cmd=_s-xclick&amp;hosted_button_id=JA8M7VDY89SQ4" onclick="window.open(this.href); return false;"><img src="$sbRoot/images/paypal/btn_donateCC_LG.gif" alt="[donate]" /></a></td>
+-            <td>Sick Beard is free, but you can contribute by giving a <b><a href="https://www.paypal.com/cgi-bin/webscr?cmd=_s-xclick&amp;hosted_button_id=JA8M7VDY89SQ4" onclick="window.open(this.href); return false;">donation</a></b>.</td>
+-        </tr>
+-    </table>
+-</div>
+-
+ #include $os.path.join($sickbeard.PROG_DIR, "data/interfaces/default/inc_bottom.tmpl")
+diff --git a/data/interfaces/default/inc_top.tmpl b/data/interfaces/default/inc_top.tmpl
+index f791be8..fb38f17 100644
+--- a/data/interfaces/default/inc_top.tmpl
++++ b/data/interfaces/default/inc_top.tmpl
+@@ -108,20 +108,6 @@
+ 
+ <body>
+     <header>
+-#if $sickbeard.NEWEST_VERSION_STRING:
+-<div id="upgrade-notification">
+-    <div>
+-        <span class="notify-text">$sickbeard.NEWEST_VERSION_STRING</span>
+-    </div>
+-</div>
+-<div id="header-fix"></div>
+-#end if
+-<div id="header">
+-    <a name="top"></a>
+-    <span id="logo"><a href="$sbRoot/home/" title="Sick Beard homepage"><img alt="Sick Beard" src="$sbRoot/images/sickbeard.png" width="150" height="72" /></a></span>
+-    <span id="versiontext">alpha <a href="https://github.com/midgetspy/Sick-Beard/wiki/ChangeLog" onclick="window.open(this.href, '_blank'); return false;">$sickbeard.version.SICKBEARD_VERSION</a></span>
+-</div>
+-
+     <div class="navbar">
+         <div class="navbar-inner">
+             <div class="container">
+@@ -208,11 +194,6 @@
+                         </li>
+                         <li class="divider-vertical"></li>
+                     </ul>
+-                    <ul class="nav pull-right">
+-                        <li>
+-                            <a id="navDonate" href="https://www.paypal.com/cgi-bin/webscr?cmd=_s-xclick&amp;hosted_button_id=JA8M7VDY89SQ4" onclick="window.open(this.href); return false;"><img src="$sbRoot/images/paypal/btn_donate_LG.gif" alt="[donate]" height="26" width="92" /></a>
+-                        </li>
+-                    </ul>
+                 </div><!-- /nav-collapse -->
+ 
+             </div><!-- /container -->

packages/3rdparty/download/SickBeard/patches/SickBeard-4e57625-002-remove_default_settings-0.3.patch

@@ -0,0 +1,75 @@
+diff --git a/data/interfaces/default/config_notifications.tmpl b/data/interfaces/default/config_notifications.tmpl
+index 826cf0a..02f14af 100755
+--- a/data/interfaces/default/config_notifications.tmpl
++++ b/data/interfaces/default/config_notifications.tmpl
+@@ -547,45 +547,6 @@
+ 
+                 <div class="component-group clearfix">
+                     <div class="component-group-desc">
+-                        <img class="notifier-icon" src="$sbRoot/images/notifiers/libnotify.png" alt="" title="Libnotify" />
+-                        <h3><a href="http://library.gnome.org/devel/libnotify/" onclick="window.open(this.href, '_blank'); return false;">Libnotify</a></h3>
+-                        <p>The standard desktop notification API for Linux/*nix systems.  This notifier will only function if the pynotify module is installed (Ubuntu/Debian package <a href="apt:python-notify">python-notify</a>).</p>
+-                    </div>
+-                    <fieldset class="component-group-list">
+-                        <div class="field-pair">
+-                            <input type="checkbox" class="enabler" name="use_libnotify" id="use_libnotify" #if $sickbeard.USE_LIBNOTIFY then "checked=\"checked\"" else ""# /> 
+-                            <label class="clearfix" for="use_libnotify">
+-                                <span class="component-title">Enable</span>
+-                                <span class="component-desc">Should Sick Beard send Libnotify notifications?</span>
+-                            </label>
+-                        </div>
+-
+-                        <div id="content_use_libnotify">
+-                            <div class="field-pair">
+-                                <input type="checkbox" name="libnotify_notify_onsnatch" id="libnotify_notify_onsnatch" #if $sickbeard.LIBNOTIFY_NOTIFY_ONSNATCH then "checked=\"checked\"" else ""# /> 
+-                                <label class="clearfix" for="libnotify_notify_onsnatch">
+-                                    <span class="component-title">Notify on Snatch</span>
+-                                    <span class="component-desc">Send notification when we start a download?</span>
+-                                </label>
+-                            </div>
+-                            <div class="field-pair">
+-                                <input type="checkbox" name="libnotify_notify_ondownload" id="libnotify_notify_ondownload" #if $sickbeard.LIBNOTIFY_NOTIFY_ONDOWNLOAD then "checked=\"checked\"" else ""# />
+-                                <label class="clearfix" for="libnotify_notify_ondownload">
+-                                    <span class="component-title">Notify on Download</span>
+-                                    <span class="component-desc">Send notification when we finish a download?</span>
+-                                </label>
+-                            </div>
+-                            <div class="testNotification" id="testLibnotify-result">Click below to test.</div>
+-                            <input type="button" class="btn" value="Test Libnotify" id="testLibnotify" />
+-                            <input type="submit" class="btn config_submitter" value="Save Changes" />
+-                        </div><!-- /content_use_libnotify //-->
+-
+-                    </fieldset>
+-                </div><!-- /libnotify component-group //-->
+-
+-
+-                <div class="component-group clearfix">
+-                    <div class="component-group-desc">
+                         <img class="notifier-icon" src="$sbRoot/images/notifiers/pushover.png" alt="" title="Pushover" />
+                         <h3><a href="http://pushover.net/" onclick="window.open(this.href, '_blank'); return false;">Pushover</a></h3>
+                         <p>Pushover makes it easy to send real-time notifications to your Android and iOS devices.</p>
+diff --git a/data/interfaces/default/inc_top.tmpl b/data/interfaces/default/inc_top.tmpl
+index fb38f17..4ead36f 100644
+--- a/data/interfaces/default/inc_top.tmpl
++++ b/data/interfaces/default/inc_top.tmpl
+@@ -172,8 +172,6 @@
+                             <ul class="dropdown-menu">
+                                 <li><a href="$sbRoot/config/"><i class="icon-question-sign"></i> Help &amp; Info</a></li>
+                                 <li class="divider"></li>
+-                                <li><a href="$sbRoot/config/general/"><i class="icon-cog"></i> General</a></li>
+-                                <li class="divider"></li>
+                                 <li><a href="$sbRoot/config/search/"><i class="icon-cog"></i> Search Settings</a></li>
+                                 <li class="divider"></li>
+                                 <li><a href="$sbRoot/config/providers/"><i class="icon-cog"></i> Search Providers</a></li>
+diff --git a/sickbeard/webserve.py b/sickbeard/webserve.py
+index 20f0dfc..b0bf6a6 100644
+--- a/sickbeard/webserve.py
++++ b/sickbeard/webserve.py
+@@ -609,7 +609,6 @@ class History:
+ 
+ 
+ ConfigMenu = [
+-    { 'title': 'General',           'path': 'config/general/'          },
+     { 'title': 'Search Settings',   'path': 'config/search/'           },
+     { 'title': 'Search Providers',  'path': 'config/providers/'        },
+     { 'title': 'Post Processing',   'path': 'config/postProcessing/'   },

packages/3rdparty/download/SickBeard/patches/SickBeard-9f64728-001-remove_logo_update-header_and_donate_button-0.1.patch

@@ -1,44 +0,0 @@
-diff -Naur SickBeard-48caf04/data/interfaces/default/config.tmpl SickBeard-48caf04.patch/data/interfaces/default/config.tmpl
---- SickBeard-48caf04/data/interfaces/default/config.tmpl	2011-04-22 19:15:10.000000000 +0200
-+++ SickBeard-48caf04.patch/data/interfaces/default/config.tmpl	2011-04-23 03:57:14.515808144 +0200
-@@ -24,9 +24,4 @@
- </table>
- </div>
- 
--<table class="infoTable" cellspacing="1" border="0" cellpadding="0"><tr>
--    <td><a href="https://www.paypal.com/cgi-bin/webscr?cmd=_s-xclick&amp;hosted_button_id=JA8M7VDY89SQ4" onclick="window.open(this.href); return false;"><img src="$sbRoot/images/paypal/btn_donateCC_LG.gif" alt="[donate]" /></a></td>
--    <td>Sickbeard is free, but you can contribute by giving a <b><a href="https://www.paypal.com/cgi-bin/webscr?cmd=_s-xclick&amp;hosted_button_id=JA8M7VDY89SQ4" onclick="window.open(this.href); return false;">donation</a></b>.</td>
--</tr></table>
--
- #include $os.path.join($sickbeard.PROG_DIR, "data/interfaces/default/inc_bottom.tmpl")
-diff -Naur SickBeard-48caf04/data/interfaces/default/inc_top.tmpl SickBeard-48caf04.patch/data/interfaces/default/inc_top.tmpl
---- SickBeard-48caf04/data/interfaces/default/inc_top.tmpl	2011-04-22 19:15:10.000000000 +0200
-+++ SickBeard-48caf04.patch/data/interfaces/default/inc_top.tmpl	2011-04-23 03:59:09.088665913 +0200
-@@ -147,19 +147,6 @@
- </head>
- 
- <body>
--#if $sickbeard.NEWEST_VERSION_STRING:
--<div id="upgrade-notification">
--    <div>
--        <span class="notify-text">$sickbeard.NEWEST_VERSION_STRING</span>
--    </div>
--</div>
--<div id="header-fix"></div>
--#end if
--<div id="header">
--    <a name="top"></a>
--    <span id="logo"><a href="$sbRoot/home/" title="Sick Beard homepage"><img alt="Sick Beard" src="$sbRoot/images/sickbeard_small.png" width="150" /></a></span>
--    <span id="versiontext">alpha $sickbeard.version.SICKBEARD_VERSION</span>
--</div>
- <ul id="MainMenu" class="sf-menu">
-             <li id="NAVsystem" class="first"><a href="#" class="navIcon"><img src="$sbRoot/images/menu/system18.png" alt="" width="18" height="18" /></a>
-                 <ul>
-@@ -197,7 +184,6 @@
-                         <li><a href="$sbRoot/errorlogs/viewlog"><img src="$sbRoot/images/menu/viewlog16.png" alt="" width="16" height="16" />View Log</a></li>
-                 </ul>
-             </li>
--            <li id="donate"><a href="https://www.paypal.com/cgi-bin/webscr?cmd=_s-xclick&amp;hosted_button_id=JA8M7VDY89SQ4" onclick="window.open(this.href); return false;"><img src="$sbRoot/images/paypal/btn_donate_LG.gif" alt="[donate]" /></a></li>
- </ul>
- #if $varExists('submenu'):
- <div id="SubMenu">

packages/3rdparty/download/SickBeard/patches/SickBeard-9f64728-002-remove_default_settings-0.3.patch

@@ -1,74 +0,0 @@
-diff -Naur SickBeard-48caf04/data/interfaces/default/config_notifications.tmpl SickBeard-48caf04.patch/data/interfaces/default/config_notifications.tmpl
---- SickBeard-48caf04/data/interfaces/default/config_notifications.tmpl	2011-04-23 03:55:23.000000000 +0200
-+++ SickBeard-48caf04.patch/data/interfaces/default/config_notifications.tmpl	2011-04-23 18:01:29.330455515 +0200
-@@ -484,48 +484,6 @@
- 
-                 </div>
- 
--
--                <div id="core-component-group7" class="component-group clearfix">
--                    <div class="component-group-desc">
--                        <h3><a href="http://library.gnome.org/devel/libnotify/" onclick="window.open(this.href, '_blank'); return false;"><img src="$sbRoot/images/notifiers/libnotify.gif" alt="Libnotify" title="Libnotify" width="16" height="16" /> Libnotify</a></h3>
--                        <p>The standard desktop notification API for Linux/*nix systems.  This notifier will only function if the pynotify module is installed (Ubuntu/Debian package <a href="apt:python-notify">python-notify</a>).</p>
--                    </div>
--
--                    <fieldset class="component-group-list">
--                        <div class="field-pair">
--                            <input type="checkbox" class="enabler" name="use_libnotify" id="use_libnotify" #if $sickbeard.USE_LIBNOTIFY then "checked=\"checked\"" else ""# /> 
--                            <label class="clearfix" for="use_libnotify">
--                                <span class="component-title">Enable</span>
--                                <span class="component-desc">Should Sick Beard send Libnotify notifications?</span>
--                            </label>
--                        </div>
--
--                        <div id="content_use_libnotify">
--                        <div class="field-pair">
--                            <input type="checkbox" name="libnotify_notify_onsnatch" id="libnotify_notify_onsnatch" #if $sickbeard.LIBNOTIFY_NOTIFY_ONSNATCH then "checked=\"checked\"" else ""# /> 
--                            <label class="clearfix" for="libnotify_notify_onsnatch">
--                                <span class="component-title">Notify on Snatch</span>
--                                <span class="component-desc">Send notification when we start a download?</span>
--                            </label>
--                        </div>
--
--                        <div class="field-pair">
--                            <input type="checkbox" name="libnotify_notify_ondownload" id="libnotify_notify_ondownload" #if $sickbeard.LIBNOTIFY_NOTIFY_ONDOWNLOAD then "checked=\"checked\"" else ""# />
--                            <label class="clearfix" for="libnotify_notify_ondownload">
--                                <span class="component-title">Notify on Download</span>
--                                <span class="component-desc">Send notification when we finish a download?</span>
--                            </label>
--                        </div>
--
--                        <div class="testNotification" id="testLibnotify-result">Click below to test.</div>
--                        <input type="button" value="Test Libnotify" id="testLibnotify" />
--                        <input type="submit" class="config_submitter" value="Save Changes" />
--
--                        </div><!-- /content_use_libnotify //-->
--
--                    </fieldset>
--                </div><!-- /component-group //-->
--
-                 <div id="core-component-group8" class="component-group clearfix">
- 
-                     <div class="component-group-desc">
-diff -Naur SickBeard-48caf04/data/interfaces/default/inc_top.tmpl SickBeard-48caf04.patch/data/interfaces/default/inc_top.tmpl
---- SickBeard-48caf04/data/interfaces/default/inc_top.tmpl	2011-04-23 03:59:09.000000000 +0200
-+++ SickBeard-48caf04.patch/data/interfaces/default/inc_top.tmpl	2011-04-23 14:24:01.035048035 +0200
-@@ -172,7 +172,6 @@
-             </li>
-             <li id="NAVconfig"><a href="$sbRoot/config">Config</a>
-                 <ul>
--                        <li><a href="$sbRoot/config/general/"><img src="$sbRoot/images/menu/config16.png" alt="" width="16" height="16" />General</a></li>
-                         <li><a href="$sbRoot/config/search/"><img src="$sbRoot/images/menu/config16.png" alt="" width="16" height="16" />Search Settings</a></li>
-                         <li><a href="$sbRoot/config/providers/"><img src="$sbRoot/images/menu/config16.png" alt="" width="16" height="16" />Search Providers</a></li>
-                         <li><a href="$sbRoot/config/postProcessing/"><img src="$sbRoot/images/menu/config16.png" alt="" width="16" height="16" />Post Processing</a></li>
-diff -Naur SickBeard-48caf04/sickbeard/webserve.py SickBeard-48caf04.patch/sickbeard/webserve.py
---- SickBeard-48caf04/sickbeard/webserve.py	2011-04-23 03:55:23.000000000 +0200
-+++ SickBeard-48caf04.patch/sickbeard/webserve.py	2011-04-23 17:55:09.270813146 +0200
-@@ -583,7 +583,6 @@
- 
- 
- ConfigMenu = [
--    { 'title': 'General',           'path': 'config/general/'          },
-     { 'title': 'Search Settings',   'path': 'config/search/'           },
-     { 'title': 'Search Providers',  'path': 'config/providers/'        },
-     { 'title': 'Post Processing',   'path': 'config/postProcessing/'   },

packages/3rdparty/graphics/imlib2/build

@@ -3,7 +3,6 @@
 ################################################################################
 #      This file is part of OpenELEC - http://www.openelec.tv
 #      Copyright (C) 2009-2011 Stephan Raue (stephan@openelec.tv)
-#      Copyright (C) 2010-2011 Roman Weber (roman@openelec.tv)
 #
 #  This Program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
 #  it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
@@ -23,20 +22,29 @@
 
 . config/options $1
 
+VDR_ADDON_DIR="/storage/.xbmc/addons/service.multimedia.vdr-addon"
+
 cd $PKG_BUILD
+
+case "$TARGET_ARCH" in
+  i386)
+    MMX_ARG="--enable-mmx --disable-amd64"
+    ;;
+  x86_64)
+    MMX_ARG="--enable-mmx --enable-amd64"
+    ;;
+  *)
+    MMX_ARG="--disable-mmx --disable-amd64"
+    ;;
+esac
+
 ./configure --host=$TARGET_NAME \
             --build=$HOST_NAME \
             --prefix=/usr \
-            --exec-prefix=/usr \
             --sysconfdir=/etc \
-            --datadir=/usr/share \
-            --disable-static \
-            --enable-shared \
-            --with-gnu-ld \
-            --without-debug \
-            --with-warn \
-            --without-python
+            $MMX_ARG
+
+sed -i "s|#define SYS_LOADERS_PATH .*|#define SYS_LOADERS_PATH \"$VDR_ADDON_DIR/lib/imlib2\"|" src/lib/loaderpath.h
 
 make
-
 $MAKEINSTALL

packages/3rdparty/graphics/imlib2/meta

@@ -18,19 +18,18 @@
 #  http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html
 ################################################################################
 
-PKG_NAME="gobject-introspection"
-PKG_VERSION="0.10.0"
+PKG_NAME="imlib2"
+PKG_VERSION="1.4.5"
 PKG_REV="1"
 PKG_ARCH="any"
 PKG_LICENSE="GPL"
-PKG_SITE="http://live.gnome.org/GObjectIntrospection"
-PKG_URL="http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gobject-introspection/0.10/$PKG_NAME-$PKG_VERSION.tar.bz2"
+PKG_SITE="http://web.enlightenment.org/"
+PKG_URL="$SOURCEFORGE_SRC/enlightenment/${PKG_NAME}-${PKG_VERSION}.tar.bz2"
 PKG_DEPENDS=""
-PKG_BUILD_DEPENDS="toolchain"
+PKG_BUILD_DEPENDS="toolchain libjpeg-turbo libpng tiff zlib bzip2 libX11 libXext"
 PKG_PRIORITY="optional"
-PKG_SECTION="devel"
-PKG_SHORTDESC="gobject-introspection: Introspection for GObject libraries"
-PKG_LONGDESC="Introspection for GObject libraries."
+PKG_SECTION="multimedia"
+PKG_SHORTDESC="Imlib2 is a graphics library."
+PKG_LONGDESC="Imlib2 is a graphics library for file loading, saving, rendering, manipulation."
 PKG_IS_ADDON="no"
-
 PKG_AUTORECONF="no"

packages/3rdparty/graphics/libpng12/build

@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+
+################################################################################
+#      This file is part of OpenELEC - http://www.openelec.tv
+#      Copyright (C) 2009-2012 Stephan Raue (stephan@openelec.tv)
+#
+#  This Program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+#  it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+#  the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+#  any later version.
+#
+#  This Program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+#  but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+#  MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+#  GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+#  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+#  along with OpenELEC.tv; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to
+#  the Free Software Foundation, 51 Franklin Street, Suite 500, Boston, MA 02110, USA.
+#  http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html
+################################################################################
+
+. config/options $1
+
+cd $PKG_BUILD
+ac_cv_lib_z_zlibVersion=yes \
+./configure --host=$TARGET_NAME \
+            --build=$HOST_NAME \
+            --prefix=/usr \
+            --sysconfdir=/etc \
+            --disable-static \
+            --enable-shared
+
+make

packages/3rdparty/graphics/libpng12/meta

@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+################################################################################
+#      This file is part of OpenELEC - http://www.openelec.tv
+#      Copyright (C) 2009-2012 Stephan Raue (stephan@openelec.tv)
+#
+#  This Program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+#  it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+#  the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+#  any later version.
+#
+#  This Program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+#  but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+#  MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+#  GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+#  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+#  along with OpenELEC.tv; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to
+#  the Free Software Foundation, 51 Franklin Street, Suite 500, Boston, MA 02110, USA.
+#  http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html
+################################################################################
+
+PKG_NAME="libpng"
+PKG_VERSION="1.2.50"
+PKG_REV="1"
+PKG_ARCH="any"
+PKG_LICENSE="OSS"
+PKG_SITE="http://www.libpng.org/"
+PKG_URL="$SOURCEFORGE_SRC/libpng/$PKG_NAME-$PKG_VERSION.tar.xz"
+PKG_DEPENDS="zlib"
+PKG_BUILD_DEPENDS="toolchain zlib"
+PKG_PRIORITY="optional"
+PKG_SECTION="graphics"
+PKG_SHORTDESC="libpng: Portable Network Graphics (PNG) Reference Library - old 1.2 version"
+PKG_LONGDESC="PNG (Portable Network Graphics) is an extensible file format for the lossless, portable, well-compressed storage of raster images. PNG provides a patent-free replacement for GIF and can also replace many common uses of TIFF. Indexed-color, grayscale, and truecolor images are supported, plus an optional alpha channel. Sample depths range from 1 to 16 bits. Old 1.2 version."
+PKG_IS_ADDON="no"
+PKG_AUTORECONF="no"

packages/3rdparty/graphics/libpng12/unpack

@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+
+################################################################################
+#      This file is part of OpenELEC - http://www.openelec.tv
+#      Copyright (C) 2009-2012 Stephan Raue (stephan@openelec.tv)
+#
+#  This Program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+#  it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+#  the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+#  any later version.
+#
+#  This Program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+#  but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+#  MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+#  GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+#  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+#  along with OpenELEC.tv; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to
+#  the Free Software Foundation, 51 Franklin Street, Suite 500, Boston, MA 02110, USA.
+#  http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html
+################################################################################
+
+. config/options $1
+
+TGZ_PKG="`echo $PKG_URL | sed 's%.*/\(.*\)$%\1%'`"
+
+  tar xJf $SOURCES/$1/$TGZ_PKG -C $BUILD >/dev/null 2>&1

packages/3rdparty/lib/ccid/build

@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+
+################################################################################
+#      This file is part of OpenELEC - http://www.openelec.tv
+#      Copyright (C) 2009-2012 Stephan Raue (stephan@openelec.tv)
+#
+#  This Program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+#  it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+#  the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+#  any later version.
+#
+#  This Program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+#  but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+#  MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+#  GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+#  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+#  along with OpenELEC.tv; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to
+#  the Free Software Foundation, 51 Franklin Street, Suite 500, Boston, MA 02110, USA.
+#  http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html
+################################################################################
+
+. config/options $1
+
+cd $PKG_BUILD
+
+./configure --host=$TARGET_NAME \
+            --build=$HOST_NAME \
+            --prefix=/usr \
+            --enable-shared \
+            --enable-static \
+            --enable-twinserial
+
+make
+make -C src/ Info.plist
+$MAKEINSTALL

packages/3rdparty/lib/ccid/meta

@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 ################################################################################
 #      This file is part of OpenELEC - http://www.openelec.tv
-#      Copyright (C) 2009-2011 Stephan Raue (stephan@openelec.tv)
+#      Copyright (C) 2009-2012 Stephan Raue (stephan@openelec.tv)
 #
 #  This Program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
 #  it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
@@ -14,23 +14,22 @@
 #
 #  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
 #  along with OpenELEC.tv; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to
-#  the Free Software Foundation, 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
+#  the Free Software Foundation, 51 Franklin Street, Suite 500, Boston, MA 02110, USA.
 #  http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html
 ################################################################################
 
-PKG_NAME="eggdbus"
-PKG_VERSION="0.6"
+PKG_NAME="ccid"
+PKG_VERSION="1.4.9"
 PKG_REV="1"
 PKG_ARCH="any"
 PKG_LICENSE="LGPL"
-PKG_SITE="http://cgit.freedesktop.org/~david/eggdbus"
-PKG_URL="http://hal.freedesktop.org/releases/$PKG_NAME-$PKG_VERSION.tar.gz"
-PKG_DEPENDS="glib dbus dbus-glib"
-PKG_BUILD_DEPENDS="toolchain eggdbus-host glib dbus dbus-glib"
+PKG_SITE="http://pcsclite.alioth.debian.org/ccid.html"
+PKG_URL="https://alioth.debian.org/frs/download.php/3866/${PKG_NAME}-${PKG_VERSION}.tar.bz2"
+PKG_DEPENDS=""
+PKG_BUILD_DEPENDS="toolchain pcsc-lite"
 PKG_PRIORITY="optional"
-PKG_SECTION="devel"
-PKG_SHORTDESC="eggdbus: D-Bus bindings for GObject"
-PKG_LONGDESC="D-Bus bindings for GObject."
+PKG_SECTION="driver"
+PKG_SHORTDESC="CCID free software driver"
+PKG_LONGDESC="CCID free software driver"
 PKG_IS_ADDON="no"
-
 PKG_AUTORECONF="yes"

packages/3rdparty/lib/cxxtools/build

@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+
+################################################################################
+#      This file is part of OpenELEC - http://www.openelec.tv
+#      Copyright (C) 2009-2012 Stephan Raue (stephan@openelec.tv)
+#
+#  This Program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+#  it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+#  the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+#  any later version.
+#
+#  This Program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+#  but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+#  MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+#  GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+#  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+#  along with OpenELEC.tv; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to
+#  the Free Software Foundation, 51 Franklin Street, Suite 500, Boston, MA 02110, USA.
+#  http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html
+################################################################################
+
+. config/options $1
+
+cd $PKG_BUILD
+
+setup_toolchain host
+
+mkdir -p .build-host && cd .build-host
+
+../configure --host=$HOST_NAME \
+            --build=$HOST_NAME \
+            --prefix=$ROOT/$TOOLCHAIN \
+            --disable-static \
+            --enable-shared
+
+make
+make install
+
+cd ..
+
+setup_toolchain target
+
+mkdir -p .build-target && cd .build-target
+../configure --host=$TARGET_NAME \
+            --build=$HOST_NAME \
+            --prefix=/usr \
+            --sysconfdir=/etc \
+            --disable-static \
+            --enable-shared
+
+$MAKEINSTALL

packages/3rdparty/lib/cxxtools/install

@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
 
 ################################################################################
 #      This file is part of OpenELEC - http://www.openelec.tv
-#      Copyright (C) 2009-2011 Stephan Raue (stephan@openelec.tv)
+#      Copyright (C) 2009-2012 Stephan Raue (stephan@openelec.tv)
 #
 #  This Program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
 #  it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
@@ -16,10 +16,8 @@
 #
 #  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
 #  along with OpenELEC.tv; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to
-#  the Free Software Foundation, 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
+#  the Free Software Foundation, 51 Franklin Street, Suite 500, Boston, MA 02110, USA.
 #  http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html
 ################################################################################
 
 . config/options $1
-
-$SCRIPTS/create_addon mame

packages/3rdparty/lib/cxxtools/meta

@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+################################################################################
+#      This file is part of OpenELEC - http://www.openelec.tv
+#      Copyright (C) 2009-2012 Stephan Raue (stephan@openelec.tv)
+#
+#  This Program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+#  it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+#  the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+#  any later version.
+#
+#  This Program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+#  but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+#  MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+#  GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+#  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+#  along with OpenELEC.tv; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to
+#  the Free Software Foundation, 51 Franklin Street, Suite 500, Boston, MA 02110, USA.
+#  http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html
+################################################################################
+
+PKG_NAME="cxxtools"
+PKG_VERSION="2.1.1"
+PKG_REV="1"
+PKG_ARCH="any"
+PKG_LICENSE="GPL-2"
+PKG_SITE="http://www.tntnet.org/cxxtools.html"
+PKG_URL="http://www.tntnet.org/download/${PKG_NAME}-${PKG_VERSION}.tar.gz"
+PKG_DEPENDS=""
+PKG_BUILD_DEPENDS="toolchain"
+PKG_PRIORITY="optional"
+PKG_SECTION="python/web"
+PKG_SHORTDESC="cxxtools: a collection of general-purpose C++ classes"
+PKG_LONGDESC="Cxxtools is a collection of general-purpose C++ classes"
+PKG_IS_ADDON="no"
+
+PKG_AUTORECONF="yes"

packages/3rdparty/lib/libhdhomerun/build

@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+
+################################################################################
+#      This file is part of OpenELEC - http://www.openelec.tv
+#      Copyright (C) 2009-2012 Stephan Raue (stephan@openelec.tv)
+#
+#  This Program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+#  it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+#  the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+#  any later version.
+#
+#  This Program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+#  but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+#  MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+#  GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+#  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+#  along with OpenELEC.tv; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to
+#  the Free Software Foundation, 51 Franklin Street, Suite 500, Boston, MA 02110, USA.
+#  http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html
+################################################################################
+
+. config/options $1
+
+cd $PKG_BUILD
+
+make CROSS_COMPILE=$TARGET_PREFIX

packages/3rdparty/lib/libhdhomerun/meta

@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+################################################################################
+#      This file is part of OpenELEC - http://www.openelec.tv
+#      Copyright (C) 2009-2012 Stephan Raue (stephan@openelec.tv)
+#
+#  This Program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+#  it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+#  the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+#  any later version.
+#
+#  This Program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+#  but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+#  MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+#  GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+#  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+#  along with OpenELEC.tv; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to
+#  the Free Software Foundation, 51 Franklin Street, Suite 500, Boston, MA 02110, USA.
+#  http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html
+################################################################################
+
+PKG_NAME="libhdhomerun"
+PKG_VERSION="20130117"
+PKG_REV="1"
+PKG_ARCH="any"
+PKG_LICENSE="LGPL"
+PKG_SITE="http://www.silicondust.com/products/hdhomerun/dvbt/"
+PKG_URL="http://download.silicondust.com/hdhomerun/${PKG_NAME}_${PKG_VERSION}.tgz"
+PKG_DEPENDS=""
+PKG_BUILD_DEPENDS="toolchain"
+PKG_PRIORITY="optional"
+PKG_SECTION="driver"
+PKG_SHORTDESC="The library provides functionality to setup the HDHomeRun, change channels, setup PID filtering, get signal quality and so on."
+PKG_LONGDESC="The library provides functionality to setup the HDHomeRun, change channels, setup PID filtering, get signal quality and so on."
+PKG_IS_ADDON="no"
+PKG_AUTORECONF="no"

packages/3rdparty/lib/libhdhomerun/rename

@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+
+################################################################################
+#      This file is part of OpenELEC - http://www.openelec.tv
+#      Copyright (C) 2009-2012 Stephan Raue (stephan@openelec.tv)
+#
+#  This Program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+#  it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+#  the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+#  any later version.
+#
+#  This Program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+#  but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+#  MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+#  GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+#  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+#  along with OpenELEC.tv; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to
+#  the Free Software Foundation, 51 Franklin Street, Suite 500, Boston, MA 02110, USA.
+#  http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html
+################################################################################
+
+. config/options $1
+
+cd $BUILD
+mv ${PKG_NAME} ${PKG_NAME}_${PKG_VERSION}

packages/3rdparty/lib/libxslt/build

@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+
+################################################################################
+#      This file is part of OpenELEC - http://www.openelec.tv
+#      Copyright (C) 2009-2012 Stephan Raue (stephan@openelec.tv)
+#
+#  This Program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+#  it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+#  the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+#  any later version.
+#
+#  This Program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+#  but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+#  MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+#  GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+#  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+#  along with OpenELEC.tv; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to
+#  the Free Software Foundation, 51 Franklin Street, Suite 500, Boston, MA 02110, USA.
+#  http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html
+################################################################################
+
+. config/options $1
+
+cd $PKG_BUILD
+
+if [ "$ICONV" = "libiconv" ]; then
+  CONFIG_LIBXML="--with-iconv"
+fi
+
+./configure --host=$TARGET_NAME \
+             --build=$HOST_NAME \
+             --prefix=/usr \
+             --sysconfdir=/etc \
+             --enable-static \
+             --enable-shared \
+             $CONFIG_LIBXML \
+             --disable-ipv6 \
+             --without-python \
+             --without-crypto
+
+make
+
+$MAKEINSTALL
+
+$SED "s:\(['= ]\)/usr:\\1$SYSROOT_PREFIX/usr:g" \
+  $SYSROOT_PREFIX/usr/bin/xslt-config
+
+mv $SYSROOT_PREFIX/usr/bin/xslt-config $ROOT/$TOOLCHAIN/bin

packages/3rdparty/lib/libxslt/meta

@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+################################################################################
+#      This file is part of OpenELEC - http://www.openelec.tv
+#      Copyright (C) 2009-2012 Stephan Raue (stephan@openelec.tv)
+#
+#  This Program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+#  it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+#  the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+#  any later version.
+#
+#  This Program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+#  but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+#  MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+#  GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+#  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+#  along with OpenELEC.tv; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to
+#  the Free Software Foundation, 51 Franklin Street, Suite 500, Boston, MA 02110, USA.
+#  http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html
+################################################################################
+
+PKG_NAME="libxslt"
+PKG_VERSION="1.1.27"
+PKG_REV="1"
+PKG_ARCH="any"
+PKG_LICENSE="MIT"
+PKG_SITE="http://xmlsoft.org/xslt/"
+PKG_URL="ftp://xmlsoft.org/libxml2/$PKG_NAME-$PKG_VERSION.tar.gz"
+PKG_DEPENDS="$ICONV"
+PKG_BUILD_DEPENDS="toolchain $ICONV"
+PKG_PRIORITY="optional"
+PKG_SECTION="textproc"
+PKG_SHORTDESC="libxslt"
+PKG_LONGDESC="libxslt"
+PKG_IS_ADDON="no"
+
+PKG_AUTORECONF="yes"

packages/3rdparty/lib/libzip/build

@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+
+################################################################################
+#      This file is part of OpenELEC - http://www.openelec.tv
+#      Copyright (C) 2009-2012 Stephan Raue (stephan@openelec.tv)
+#
+#  This Program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+#  it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+#  the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+#  any later version.
+#
+#  This Program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+#  but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+#  MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+#  GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+#  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+#  along with OpenELEC.tv; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to
+#  the Free Software Foundation, 51 Franklin Street, Suite 500, Boston, MA 02110, USA.
+#  http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html
+################################################################################
+
+. config/options $1
+
+cd $PKG_BUILD
+
+./configure \
+       --host=$TARGET_NAME \
+       --build=$HOST_NAME \
+       --prefix=/usr 
+
+$MAKEINSTALL

packages/3rdparty/lib/libzip/meta

@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+################################################################################
+#      This file is part of OpenELEC - http://www.openelec.tv
+#      Copyright (C) 2009-2012 Stephan Raue (stephan@openelec.tv)
+#
+#  This Program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+#  it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+#  the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+#  any later version.
+#
+#  This Program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+#  but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+#  MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+#  GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+#  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+#  along with OpenELEC.tv; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to
+#  the Free Software Foundation, 51 Franklin Street, Suite 500, Boston, MA 02110, USA.
+#  http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html
+################################################################################
+
+PKG_NAME="libzip"
+PKG_VERSION="0.10.1"
+PKG_REV="1"
+PKG_ARCH="any"
+PKG_LICENSE="GPL"
+PKG_SITE="http://www.nih.at/libzip/"
+PKG_URL="http://www.nih.at/libzip/${PKG_NAME}-${PKG_VERSION}.tar.bz2"
+PKG_DEPENDS=""
+PKG_BUILD_DEPENDS="toolchain"
+PKG_PRIORITY="optional"
+PKG_SHORTDESC="libzip"
+PKG_LONGDESC="libzip"
+PKG_IS_ADDON="no"
+PKG_AUTORECONF="no"

packages/3rdparty/multimedia/pybonjour/meta

@@ -1,35 +0,0 @@
-################################################################################
-#      This file is part of OpenELEC - http://www.openelec.tv
-#      Copyright (C) 2009-2011 Stephan Raue (stephan@openelec.tv)
-#
-#  This Program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
-#  it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
-#  the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
-#  any later version.
-#
-#  This Program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
-#  but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
-#  MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
-#  GNU General Public License for more details.
-#
-#  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
-#  along with OpenELEC.tv; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to
-#  the Free Software Foundation, 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
-#  http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html
-################################################################################
-
-PKG_NAME="pybonjour"
-PKG_VERSION="1.1.1"
-PKG_REV="1"
-PKG_ARCH="any"
-PKG_LICENSE="GPL"
-PKG_SITE="http://pybonjour.googlecode.com/"
-PKG_URL="http://pybonjour.googlecode.com/files/${PKG_NAME}-${PKG_VERSION}.tar.gz"
-PKG_DEPENDS=""
-PKG_BUILD_DEPENDS="Python"
-PKG_PRIORITY="optional"
-PKG_SECTION="service/multimedia"
-PKG_SHORTDESC="pybonjour: A Zeroconf mDNS/DNS-SD responder"
-PKG_LONGDESC="Pybonjour is a framework for Multicast DNS Service Discovery (mDNS/DNS-SD a.k.a. Zeroconf) on Linux. It allows programs to publish and discover services running on a local network with no specific configuration. For example, you can plug into a network and instantly find printers to print to, files to look at, and people to talk to."
-PKG_IS_ADDON="no"
-PKG_AUTORECONF="no"

packages/3rdparty/multimedia/rotorng/build

@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+
+################################################################################
+#      This file is part of OpenELEC - http://www.openelec.tv
+#      Copyright (C) 2009-2012 Stephan Raue (stephan@openelec.tv)
+#
+#  This Program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+#  it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+#  the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+#  any later version.
+#
+#  This Program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+#  but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+#  MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+#  GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+#  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+#  along with OpenELEC.tv; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to
+#  the Free Software Foundation, 51 Franklin Street, Suite 500, Boston, MA 02110, USA.
+#  http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html
+################################################################################
+
+. config/options $1
+
+VDR_DIR=`basename $BUILD/vdr-[0-9]*`
+
+cd $PKG_BUILD
+
+make VDRDIR="../$VDR_DIR" LIBDIR="." LOCALEDIR="./locale"
+

packages/3rdparty/multimedia/rotorng/meta

@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+################################################################################
+#      This file is part of OpenELEC - http://www.openelec.tv
+#      Copyright (C) 2009-2012 Stephan Raue (stephan@openelec.tv)
+#
+#  This Program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+#  it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+#  the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+#  any later version.
+#
+#  This Program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+#  but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+#  MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+#  GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+#  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+#  along with OpenELEC.tv; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to
+#  the Free Software Foundation, 51 Franklin Street, Suite 500, Boston, MA 02110, USA.
+#  http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html
+################################################################################
+
+PKG_NAME="rotorng"
+PKG_VERSION="0.1.0"
+PKG_REV="1"
+PKG_ARCH="any"
+PKG_LICENSE="GPL"
+PKG_SITE="http://projects.vdr-developer.org/projects/plg-rotor-ng"
+PKG_URL="http://projects.vdr-developer.org/attachments/download/631/rotorng-${PKG_VERSION}.tar.gz"
+PKG_DEPENDS="vdr"
+PKG_BUILD_DEPENDS="toolchain vdr"
+PKG_PRIORITY="optional"
+PKG_SECTION="multimedia"
+PKG_SHORTDESC="Next generation of a VDR plugin design to drive a diseqc rotor"
+PKG_LONGDESC="Next generation of a VDR plugin design to drive a diseqc rotor"
+
+PKG_IS_ADDON="no"
+
+PKG_AUTORECONF="no"

packages/3rdparty/multimedia/rotorng/patches/rotorng-0.1.0-vdr.patch

@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+diff -uNr rotorng-0.1.0-orig/rotorng.c rotorng-0.1.0/rotorng.c
+--- rotorng-0.1.0-orig/rotorng.c	2012-05-06 16:14:06.000000000 +0200
++++ rotorng-0.1.0/rotorng.c	2012-05-07 10:52:18.000000000 +0200
+@@ -338,7 +338,7 @@
+   int last_position_shown;
+   bool transfer;
+ protected:
+-  virtual void ChannelSwitch(const cDevice *Device, int ChannelNumber);
++  virtual void ChannelSwitch(const cDevice *Device, int ChannelNumber,bool LiveView);
+ public:
+   cStatusMonitor();
+ };
+@@ -348,7 +348,7 @@
+   transfer=false;
+ }
+ 
+-void cStatusMonitor::ChannelSwitch(const cDevice *Device, int ChannelNumber)
++void cStatusMonitor::ChannelSwitch(const cDevice *Device, int ChannelNumber,bool LiveView)
+ {
+   //actuator_status status;
+   if (ChannelNumber) {
+@@ -1494,7 +1494,7 @@
+                snprintf(buf, sizeof(buf),"%s %d", tr(menucaption[itemindex]), menuvalue[itemindex]);
+                break;  
+              case MI_SYSTEM:
+-               snprintf(buf, sizeof(buf),"%s %s", tr(menucaption[itemindex]), MapToUserString(menuvalue[itemindex], SystemValues));
++               snprintf(buf, sizeof(buf),"%s %s", tr(menucaption[itemindex]), MapToUserString(menuvalue[itemindex], SystemValuesSat));
+                break;
+              case MI_MODULATION:
+                snprintf(buf, sizeof(buf),"%s %s ", tr(menucaption[itemindex]), MapToUserString(menuvalue[itemindex], ModulationValues));

packages/3rdparty/multimedia/shairport/patches/shairport-346db95-ao_select-0.1.patch

@@ -1,66 +0,0 @@
-diff -uNr shairport_orig/Makefile shairport/Makefile
---- shairport_orig/Makefile	2011-08-09 23:07:40.000000000 +0200
-+++ shairport/Makefile	2011-08-15 20:02:36.000000000 +0200
-@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
--CFLAGS:=-O2 -Wall $(shell pkg-config --cflags openssl ao)
--LDFLAGS:=-lm -lpthread $(shell pkg-config --libs openssl ao)
-+CFLAGS?=-O2 -Wall $(shell pkg-config --cflags openssl ao)
-+LDFLAGS?=-lm -lpthread $(shell pkg-config --libs openssl ao)
- OBJS=socketlib.o shairport.o alac.o hairtunes.o
- all: hairtunes shairport
- 
-diff -uNr shairport_orig/shairport.c shairport/shairport.c
---- shairport_orig/shairport.c	2011-08-09 23:07:40.000000000 +0200
-+++ shairport/shairport.c	2011-08-09 11:37:52.000000000 +0200
-@@ -51,6 +51,9 @@
- #define HEADER_LOG_LEVEL LOG_DEBUG
- #define AVAHI_LOG_LEVEL LOG_DEBUG
- 
-+char tAoDeviceName[56] = "";
-+char tAoDriver[56] = "";
-+
- int main(int argc, char **argv)
- {
-   char tHWID[HWID_SIZE] = {0,51,52,53,54,55};
-@@ -129,6 +132,14 @@
-     {
-       kCurrentLogLevel = LOG_DEBUG_VV;
-     }    
-+    else if(!strncmp(arg, "--ao_driver=", 12))
-+    {
-+      strncpy(tAoDriver, arg+12, 55);
-+    }
-+    else if(!strncmp(arg, "--ao_devicename=", 16))
-+    {
-+      strncpy(tAoDeviceName, arg+16, 55);
-+    }
-     else if(!strcmp(arg, "-h") || !strcmp(arg, "--help"))
-     {
-       slog(LOG_INFO, "ShairPort version 0.05 C port - Airport Express emulator\n");
-@@ -140,6 +151,8 @@
-       slog(LOG_INFO, "  -d                      Daemon mode\n");
-       slog(LOG_INFO, "  -q, --quiet             Supresses all output.\n");
-       slog(LOG_INFO, "  -v,-v2,-v3,-vv          Various debugging levels\n");
-+      slog(LOG_INFO, "  --ao_driver=driver          Sets the ao driver (optional)\n");
-+      slog(LOG_INFO, "  --ao_devicename=devicename  Sets the ao device name (optional)\n");
-       slog(LOG_INFO, "\n");
-       return 0;
-     }    
-@@ -731,8 +744,6 @@
-       slog(LOG_DEBUG_V, "Got %d for CPort and %d for TPort\n", tControlport, tTimingport);
-       char *tRtp = NULL;
-       char *tPipe = NULL;
--      char *tAoDriver = NULL;
--      char *tAoDeviceName = NULL;
-       char *tAoDeviceId = NULL;
- 
-       // *************************************************
-@@ -758,7 +769,7 @@
-       }
-       cleanupBuffers(pConn);
-       hairtunes_init(tKeys->aeskey, tKeys->aesiv, tKeys->fmt, tControlport, tTimingport,
--                      tDataport, tRtp, tPipe, tAoDriver, tAoDeviceName, tAoDeviceId);
-+                      tDataport, tRtp, tPipe, tAoDriver[0]!='\0'?tAoDriver:NULL, tAoDeviceName[0]!='\0'?tAoDeviceName:NULL, tAoDeviceId);
- 
-       // Quit when finished.
-       slog(LOG_DEBUG, "Returned from hairtunes init....returning -1, should close out this whole side of the fork\n");

packages/3rdparty/multimedia/simplejson-ap/meta

@@ -1,35 +0,0 @@
-################################################################################
-#      This file is part of OpenELEC - http://www.openelec.tv
-#      Copyright (C) 2009-2011 Stephan Raue (stephan@openelec.tv)
-#
-#  This Program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
-#  it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
-#  the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
-#  any later version.
-#
-#  This Program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
-#  but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
-#  MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
-#  GNU General Public License for more details.
-#
-#  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
-#  along with OpenELEC.tv; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to
-#  the Free Software Foundation, 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
-#  http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html
-################################################################################
-
-PKG_NAME="simplejson-ap"
-PKG_VERSION="2.1.3"
-PKG_REV="1"
-PKG_ARCH="any"
-PKG_LICENSE="GPL"
-PKG_SITE="http://pypi.python.org/"
-PKG_URL="http://dl.dropbox.com/u/8224157/OpenELEC-Ultra/addons/${PKG_NAME}-${PKG_VERSION}.tar.gz"
-PKG_DEPENDS=""
-PKG_BUILD_DEPENDS="Python"
-PKG_PRIORITY="optional"
-PKG_SECTION="service/multimedia"
-PKG_SHORTDESC="simplejson: JSON encoder and decoder for Python"
-PKG_LONGDESC="simplejson is a simple, fast, complete, correct and extensible JSON <http://json.org> encoder and decoder for Python 2.5+. It is pure Python code with no dependencies, but includes an optional C extension for a serious speed boost."
-PKG_IS_ADDON="no"
-PKG_AUTORECONF="no"

packages/3rdparty/multimedia/vdr-control/build

@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
 
 ################################################################################
 #      This file is part of OpenELEC - http://www.openelec.tv
-#      Copyright (C) 2009-2011 Stephan Raue (stephan@openelec.tv)
+#      Copyright (C) 2009-2012 Stephan Raue (stephan@openelec.tv)
 #
 #  This Program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
 #  it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
@@ -16,17 +16,18 @@
 #
 #  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
 #  along with OpenELEC.tv; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to
-#  the Free Software Foundation, 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
+#  the Free Software Foundation, 51 Franklin Street, Suite 500, Boston, MA 02110, USA.
 #  http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html
 ################################################################################
 
 . config/options $1
 
+CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -fPIC"
+CXXFLAGS="$CXXFLAGS -fPIC"
+LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -fPIC"
+
+VDR_DIR=`basename $BUILD/vdr-[0-9]*`
+
 cd $PKG_BUILD
-
-# fix some directives after unpacking
-sed -i "s|KDIR = .*|KDIR = $(kernel_path)|" Makefile
-sed -i "s|KSRC = .*|KSRC = \$KDIR|" Makefile
-sed -i "s|KINS = .*|KINS = \./modules|" Makefile
-
-make CC=$CC
+  PWD=`pwd`
+  make VDRDIR="$PWD/../$VDR_DIR" LIBDIR="." LOCALEDIR="./locale"

packages/3rdparty/multimedia/vdr-control/meta

@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+################################################################################
+#      This file is part of OpenELEC - http://www.openelec.tv
+#      Copyright (C) 2009-2012 Stephan Raue (stephan@openelec.tv)
+#
+#  This Program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+#  it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+#  the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+#  any later version.
+#
+#  This Program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+#  but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+#  MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+#  GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+#  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+#  along with OpenELEC.tv; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to
+#  the Free Software Foundation, 51 Franklin Street, Suite 500, Boston, MA 02110, USA.
+#  http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html
+################################################################################
+
+PKG_NAME="vdr-control"
+PKG_VERSION="0.0.2a"
+PKG_REV="1"
+PKG_ARCH="any"
+PKG_LICENSE="GPL"
+PKG_SITE="http://ricomp.de/vdr/"
+PKG_URL="http://ricomp.de/vdr/${PKG_NAME}-${PKG_VERSION}.tgz"
+PKG_DEPENDS="vdr"
+PKG_BUILD_DEPENDS="toolchain vdr"
+PKG_PRIORITY="optional"
+PKG_SECTION="multimedia"
+PKG_SHORTDESC="vdr control plugin"
+PKG_LONGDESC="vdr control plugin"
+
+PKG_IS_ADDON="no"
+
+PKG_AUTORECONF="no"

packages/3rdparty/multimedia/vdr-control/patches/vdr-control-0.0.2a-01_Makefile-fPIC-fix.patch

@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+#!/bin/sh /usr/share/dpatch/dpatch-run
+
+## Makefile-fPIC-fix patch
+##
+## All lines beginning with `## DP:' are a description of the patch.
+## DP: Adds -fPIC to Makefile to fix potential FTBFS.
+
+@DPATCH@
+diff -urNad /usr/src/cvs/vdrdevel-plugin-rotor/Makefile vdrdevel-plugin-rotor/Makefile
+--- /usr/src/cvs/vdrdevel-plugin-rotor/Makefile	Sun May 16 15:48:12 2004
++++ vdrdevel-plugin-rotor/Makefile	Sat Sep 11 00:28:18 2004
+@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
+ ### The C++ compiler and options:
+ 
+ CXX      ?= g++
+-CXXFLAGS ?= -O2 -Wall -Woverloaded-virtual
++CXXFLAGS ?= -fPIC -O2 -Wall -Woverloaded-virtual
+ 
+ ### The directory environment:
+ 

packages/3rdparty/multimedia/vdr-control/patches/vdr-control-0.0.2a-02_gateway.patch

@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+#! /bin/sh /usr/share/dpatch/dpatch-run
+## 02_gateway.dpatch by Walter, dg9ep @ vdrportal.de
+##
+## All lines beginning with `## DP:' are a description of the patch.
+## DP: Fixes problems when ending a telnet session with ctrl-c
+## DP: see: http://www.vdr-portal.de/board/thread.php?threadid=49680
+
+@DPATCH@
+diff -urNad vdr-plugin-control-0.0.2a~/gateway.c vdr-plugin-control-0.0.2a/gateway.c
+--- vdr-plugin-control-0.0.2a~/gateway.c	2004-07-02 21:24:22.000000000 +0200
++++ vdr-plugin-control-0.0.2a/gateway.c	2007-04-12 22:51:16.000000000 +0200
+@@ -36,7 +36,7 @@
+   _pTelnet	(0),
+   _pFormatter   (0)
+ {
+-  gl_CtrlGatewayCol.Add(this);
++//  gl_CtrlGatewayCol.Add(this);
+ 
+ //  if (! cKbdRemoteForControl::_pRemote)
+ //    cKbdRemoteForControl::_pRemote = new cKbdRemoteForControl();
+@@ -163,8 +163,8 @@
+ 
+ //  UnprepareSocket();
+ 
+-  if (! _terminating)
+-    gl_CtrlGatewayCol.Del(this);
++//  if (! _terminating)
++//    gl_CtrlGatewayCol.Del(this);
+ 
+   conDSYSLOG("gateway thread ended (pid=%d)", getpid());
+ conLOG_GATEW("gateway thread ended (pid=%d)", getpid());

packages/3rdparty/multimedia/vdr-control/patches/vdr-control-0.0.2a-92_control-1.3.18.patch

@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+#!/bin/sh /usr/share/dpatch/dpatch-run
+
+## control-1.3.18 patch - by Thomas G<>nther <tom@toms-cafe.de>
+##
+## All lines beginning with `## DP:' are a description of the patch.
+## DP: Changes for VDR >= 1.3.18.
+
+@DPATCH@
+--- control-0.0.2a/gateway.c
++++ control-0.0.2a/gateway.c
+@@ -102,7 +102,12 @@
+ 
+       uint64 Command = 0;
+       uint i = 0;
++#if VDRVERSNUM >= 10318
++      cTimeMs timeout;
++      timeout.Set(100);
++#else
+       int t0 = time_ms();
++#endif
+       while (_active && i < sizeof(Command)) {
+ 
+         uchar ch;
+@@ -131,7 +136,11 @@
+           // of their codes, so we'll need to wait some 100ms to see if
+           // there is more coming up - or whether this really is the 'ESC'
+           // key (if somebody knows how to clean this up, please let me know):
++#if VDRVERSNUM >= 10318
++          if (Command == 0x1B && !timeout.TimedOut())
++#else
+           if (Command == 0x1B && time_ms() - t0 < 100)
++#endif
+             continue;
+ 
+           if (Command) {

packages/3rdparty/multimedia/vdr-control/patches/vdr-control-0.0.2a-93_control-0.0.2a-1.5.0.patch

@@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
+#! /bin/sh /usr/share/dpatch/dpatch-run
+## 93_control-0.0.2a-1.5.0.dpatch by Thomas G<>nther <tom@toms-cafe.de>
+##
+## All lines beginning with `## DP:' are a description of the patch.
+## DP: Changes for VDR >= 1.5.0 (applicable to VDR >= 1.4.5).
+
+@DPATCH@
+--- control-0.0.2a/gateway.c
++++ control-0.0.2a/gateway.c
+@@ -100,7 +100,7 @@
+ 
+     if (_stack.poll(100)) {
+ 
+-      uint64 Command = 0;
++      uint64_t Command = 0;
+       uint i = 0;
+       int t0 = time_ms();
+       while (_active && i < sizeof(Command)) {
+--- control-0.0.2a/keyboard.c
++++ control-0.0.2a/keyboard.c
+@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
+ 
+ struct tKbdMap {
+   eKbdFunc func;
+-  uint64 code;
++  uint64_t code;
+ };
+ 
+ 
+@@ -117,7 +117,7 @@
+ 
+ 
+ 
+-bool cCtrlKeyboard::intPut(uint64 Command, bool Repeat, bool Release) {
++bool cCtrlKeyboard::intPut(uint64_t Command, bool Repeat, bool Release) {
+ 
+   bool ret = cRemote::Put(Command, Repeat, Release);
+ conLOG_KEYB("%s cKbdRemoteForControl::intPut(0x%016LX)", ret ? "true" : "false", Command);
+@@ -126,7 +126,7 @@
+ 
+ 
+ 
+-bool cCtrlKeyboard::Put(uint64 Command, bool Repeat, bool Release) {
++bool cCtrlKeyboard::Put(uint64_t Command, bool Repeat, bool Release) {
+ 
+   if (! _pRemote)
+     _pRemote = new cCtrlKeyboard();
+@@ -136,7 +136,7 @@
+ 
+ 
+ 
+-int cCtrlKeyboard::MapCodeToFunc(uint64 Code) {
++int cCtrlKeyboard::MapCodeToFunc(uint64_t Code) {
+ 
+   for (const tKbdMap *p = keyboardKbdMap; p->func != kfNone; p++) {
+     if (p->code == Code)
+--- control-0.0.2a/keyboard.h
++++ control-0.0.2a/keyboard.h
+@@ -30,11 +30,11 @@
+   cCtrlKeyboard();
+   virtual ~cCtrlKeyboard();
+ 
+-  bool intPut(uint64 Command, bool Repeat, bool Release);
++  bool intPut(uint64_t Command, bool Repeat, bool Release);
+ 
+ public:
+-  static bool Put(uint64 Command, bool Repeat = false, bool Release = false);
+-  static int MapCodeToFunc(uint64 Code);
++  static bool Put(uint64_t Command, bool Repeat = false, bool Release = false);
++  static int MapCodeToFunc(uint64_t Code);
+ };
+ 
+ 

packages/3rdparty/multimedia/vdr-control/patches/vdr-control-0.0.2a-94_gcc-4.4.patch

@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+#! /bin/sh /usr/share/dpatch/dpatch-run
+## 94_gcc-4.4.dpatch by Tobias Grimm <etobi@debian.org>
+##
+## All lines beginning with `## DP:' are a description of the patch.
+## DP: No description.
+
+@DPATCH@
+diff -urNad vdr-plugin-control-0.0.2a~/formatter.c vdr-plugin-control-0.0.2a/formatter.c
+--- vdr-plugin-control-0.0.2a~/formatter.c	2004-07-02 21:24:22.000000000 +0200
++++ vdr-plugin-control-0.0.2a/formatter.c	2009-11-11 22:07:56.000000000 +0100
+@@ -165,7 +165,7 @@
+ 
+   if (Title) {
+ 
+-    char* t = strchr(Title, '\t');
++    const char* t = strchr(Title, '\t');
+     if (t) {
+ 
+       int size = t - Title;
+@@ -300,7 +300,7 @@
+ 
+   for (;;) {
+ 
+-    char* t = strchr(text, '\t');
++    const char* t = strchr(text, '\t');
+     if (t) {
+       // Tab found - check if the tab can be used
+ 

packages/3rdparty/multimedia/vdr-control/patches/vdr-control-0.0.2a-95_vdr-crash-fix.patch

@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+diff -Nru control-0.0.2a-kw3/control.c control-0.0.2a-kw3_0/control.c
+--- control-0.0.2a-kw3/control.c	2008-09-26 16:19:29.000000000 +0200
++++ control-0.0.2a-kw3_0/control.c	2012-08-04 12:17:08.000000000 +0200
+@@ -32,6 +32,7 @@
+ class cPluginControl : public cPlugin {
+ private:
+   // Add any member variables or functions you may need here.
++  cCtrlState* _pState;
+   cCtrlGateways* _pReceivers;
+   cCtrlGateway*  _pTerminal;
+ 
+@@ -67,6 +68,7 @@
+ cPluginControl::~cPluginControl()
+ {
+   // Clean up after yourself!
++  delete(_pState);
+   delete(_pReceivers);
+   delete(_pTerminal);
+ }
+@@ -120,7 +122,7 @@
+   // Start any background activities the plugin shall perform.
+ 
+   if (glParPort || glParTerminal && *glParTerminal)
+-    new cCtrlState();
++    _pState = new cCtrlState();
+ 
+   if (glParPort) {
+     _pReceivers = new cCtrlGateways();

packages/3rdparty/multimedia/vdr-control/rename

@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
 
 ################################################################################
 #      This file is part of OpenELEC - http://www.openelec.tv
-#      Copyright (C) 2009-2011 Stephan Raue (stephan@openelec.tv)
+#      Copyright (C) 2009-2012 Stephan Raue (stephan@openelec.tv)
 #
 #  This Program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
 #  it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
@@ -16,11 +16,11 @@
 #
 #  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
 #  along with OpenELEC.tv; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to
-#  the Free Software Foundation, 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
+#  the Free Software Foundation, 51 Franklin Street, Suite 500, Boston, MA 02110, USA.
 #  http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html
 ################################################################################
 
 . config/options $1
 
-mkdir -p $INSTALL/usr/lib
-  cp -PR $PKG_BUILD/lib/lib*.so* $INSTALL/usr/lib
+cd $BUILD
+mv control-${PKG_VERSION} ${PKG_NAME}-${PKG_VERSION}

packages/3rdparty/multimedia/vdr-dynamite/build

@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+
+################################################################################
+#      This file is part of OpenELEC - http://www.openelec.tv
+#      Copyright (C) 2009-2012 Stephan Raue (stephan@openelec.tv)
+#
+#  This Program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+#  it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+#  the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+#  any later version.
+#
+#  This Program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+#  but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+#  MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+#  GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+#  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+#  along with OpenELEC.tv; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to
+#  the Free Software Foundation, 51 Franklin Street, Suite 500, Boston, MA 02110, USA.
+#  http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html
+################################################################################
+
+. config/options $1
+
+VDR_DIR=`basename $BUILD/vdr-[0-9]*`
+
+# dont build parallel
+  MAKEFLAGS=-j1
+
+cd $PKG_BUILD
+  make VDRDIR="../$VDR_DIR" LIBDIR="." LOCALEDIR="./locale"
+

packages/3rdparty/multimedia/vdr-dynamite/meta

@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+################################################################################
+#      This file is part of OpenELEC - http://www.openelec.tv
+#      Copyright (C) 2009-2012 Stephan Raue (stephan@openelec.tv)
+#
+#  This Program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+#  it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+#  the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+#  any later version.
+#
+#  This Program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+#  but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+#  MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+#  GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+#  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+#  along with OpenELEC.tv; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to
+#  the Free Software Foundation, 51 Franklin Street, Suite 500, Boston, MA 02110, USA.
+#  http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html
+################################################################################
+
+PKG_NAME="vdr-dynamite"
+PKG_VERSION="914af24"
+PKG_REV="1"
+PKG_ARCH="any"
+PKG_LICENSE="GPL"
+PKG_SITE="http://projects.vdr-developer.org/projects/plg-dynamite"
+PKG_URL="$DISTRO_SRC/$PKG_NAME-$PKG_VERSION.tar.xz"
+PKG_DEPENDS="vdr systemd"
+PKG_BUILD_DEPENDS="toolchain vdr systemd"
+PKG_PRIORITY="optional"
+PKG_SECTION="multimedia"
+PKG_SHORTDESC="vdr-dynamite turns the dvbdevices into hotpluggable devices. They can be dynamically attached and detached while vdr is running."
+PKG_LONGDESC="This plugin turns the dvbdevices into hotpluggable devices. They can be dynamically attached and detached while vdr is running."
+
+PKG_IS_ADDON="no"
+
+PKG_AUTORECONF="no"

packages/3rdparty/multimedia/vdr-epgsearch/build

@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+
+################################################################################
+#      This file is part of OpenELEC - http://www.openelec.tv
+#      Copyright (C) 2009-2012 Stephan Raue (stephan@openelec.tv)
+#
+#  This Program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+#  it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+#  the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+#  any later version.
+#
+#  This Program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+#  but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+#  MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+#  GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+#  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+#  along with OpenELEC.tv; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to
+#  the Free Software Foundation, 51 Franklin Street, Suite 500, Boston, MA 02110, USA.
+#  http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html
+################################################################################
+
+. config/options $1
+
+VDR_DIR=`basename $BUILD/vdr-[0-9]*`
+cd $PKG_BUILD
+  PWD=`pwd`
+  make VDRDIR="$PWD/../$VDR_DIR" LIBDIR="." LOCALEDIR="./locale"

packages/3rdparty/multimedia/vdr-epgsearch/meta

@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+################################################################################
+#      This file is part of OpenELEC - http://www.openelec.tv
+#      Copyright (C) 2009-2012 Stephan Raue (stephan@openelec.tv)
+#
+#  This Program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+#  it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+#  the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+#  any later version.
+#
+#  This Program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+#  but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+#  MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+#  GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+#  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+#  along with OpenELEC.tv; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to
+#  the Free Software Foundation, 51 Franklin Street, Suite 500, Boston, MA 02110, USA.
+#  http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html
+################################################################################
+
+PKG_NAME="vdr-epgsearch"
+PKG_VERSION="0fc4817"
+PKG_REV="1"
+PKG_ARCH="any"
+PKG_LICENSE="GPL"
+PKG_SITE="http://winni.vdr-developer.org/epgsearch/"
+PKG_URL="$DISTRO_SRC/$PKG_NAME-$PKG_VERSION.tar.xz"
+PKG_DEPENDS="vdr"
+PKG_BUILD_DEPENDS="toolchain vdr"
+PKG_PRIORITY="optional"
+PKG_SECTION="multimedia"
+PKG_SHORTDESC="vdr-epgsearch"
+PKG_LONGDESC="vdr-epgsearch"
+
+PKG_IS_ADDON="no"
+
+PKG_AUTORECONF="no"

packages/3rdparty/multimedia/vdr-iptv/build

@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
 
 ################################################################################
 #      This file is part of OpenELEC - http://www.openelec.tv
-#      Copyright (C) 2009-2011 Stephan Raue (stephan@openelec.tv)
+#      Copyright (C) 2009-2012 Stephan Raue (stephan@openelec.tv)
 #
 #  This Program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
 #  it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
@@ -16,19 +16,18 @@
 #
 #  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
 #  along with OpenELEC.tv; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to
-#  the Free Software Foundation, 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
+#  the Free Software Foundation, 51 Franklin Street, Suite 500, Boston, MA 02110, USA.
 #  http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html
 ################################################################################
 
 . config/options $1
 
-export LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -liconv"
+VDR_DIR=`basename $BUILD/vdr-[0-9]*`
+
+CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -fPIC"
+CXXFLAGS="$CXXFLAGS -fPIC"
+LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -fPIC"
 
 cd $PKG_BUILD
-./configure --prefix=/usr \
-            --arch=$TARGET_ARCH \
-            --cpu=$TARGET_CPU \
-            --cc=$TARGET_CC \
-            --release
+make VDRDIR="../$VDR_DIR" LIBDIR="." LOCALEDIR="./locale"
 
-make

packages/3rdparty/multimedia/vdr-iptv/meta

@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+################################################################################
+#      This file is part of OpenELEC - http://www.openelec.tv
+#      Copyright (C) 2009-2012 Stephan Raue (stephan@openelec.tv)
+#
+#  This Program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+#  it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+#  the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+#  any later version.
+#
+#  This Program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+#  but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+#  MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+#  GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+#  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+#  along with OpenELEC.tv; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to
+#  the Free Software Foundation, 51 Franklin Street, Suite 500, Boston, MA 02110, USA.
+#  http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html
+################################################################################
+
+PKG_NAME="vdr-iptv"
+PKG_VERSION="0.5.2"
+PKG_REV="1"
+PKG_ARCH="any"
+PKG_LICENSE="GPL"
+PKG_SITE="http://www.saunalahti.fi/~rahrenbe/vdr/iptv/"
+PKG_URL="http://www.saunalahti.fi/~rahrenbe/vdr/iptv/files/$PKG_NAME-$PKG_VERSION.tgz"
+PKG_DEPENDS="vdr"
+PKG_BUILD_DEPENDS="toolchain vdr"
+PKG_PRIORITY="optional"
+PKG_SECTION="multimedia"
+PKG_SHORTDESC="vdr-iptv: an IPTV plugin for the Video Disk Recorder (VDR)"
+PKG_LONGDESC="vdr-iptv is an IPTV plugin for the Video Disk Recorder (VDR)"
+
+PKG_IS_ADDON="no"
+
+PKG_AUTORECONF="no"

packages/3rdparty/multimedia/vdr-iptv/patches/vdr-iptv-0.5.2-skip_header_processing.patch

@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+From c7cd9b614762103a95f3da27783e03ce115d43fb Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
+From: Stefan Saraev <stefan@saraev.ca>
+Date: Sun, 20 May 2012 16:05:51 +0300
+Subject: [PATCH] vdr-iptv: skip header processing
+
+---
+ protocolhttp.c |   12 +-----------
+ 1 files changed, 1 insertions(+), 11 deletions(-)
+
+diff --git a/protocolhttp.c b/protocolhttp.c
+index de50f64..45c5425 100644
+--- a/protocolhttp.c
++++ b/protocolhttp.c
+@@ -140,17 +140,7 @@ bool cIptvProtocolHttp::ProcessHeaders(void)
+     memset(buf, '\0', sizeof(buf));
+     if (!GetHeaderLine(buf, sizeof(buf), lineLength))
+        return false;
+-    if (!responseFound && sscanf(buf, fmt, &version, &response) != 2) {
+-       error("Expected HTTP header not found\n");
+-       continue;
+-       }
+-    else
+-       responseFound = true;
+-    // Allow only 'OK' and 'Partial Content'
+-    if ((response != 200) && (response != 206)) {
+-       error("Invalid HTTP response (%d): %s\n", response, buf);
+-       return false;
+-       }
++      responseFound = true;
+     }
+   return true;
+ }
+-- 
+1.7.2.5
+

packages/3rdparty/multimedia/vdr-iptv/patches/vdr-iptv-0.5.2-use-our-strip.patch

@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+diff --git a/Makefile b/Makefile
+index d41acd1..58faab1 100644
+--- a/Makefile
++++ b/Makefile
+@@ -5,9 +5,6 @@
+ # Debugging on/off 
+ #IPTV_DEBUG = 1
+ 
+-# Strip debug symbols?  Set eg. to /bin/true if not
+-STRIP = strip
+-
+ # The official name of this plugin.
+ # This name will be used in the '-P...' option of VDR to load the plugin.
+ # By default the main source file also carries this name.

packages/3rdparty/multimedia/vdr-iptv/rename

@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
 
 ################################################################################
 #      This file is part of OpenELEC - http://www.openelec.tv
-#      Copyright (C) 2009-2011 Stephan Raue (stephan@openelec.tv)
+#      Copyright (C) 2009-2012 Stephan Raue (stephan@openelec.tv)
 #
 #  This Program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
 #  it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
@@ -16,11 +16,11 @@
 #
 #  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
 #  along with OpenELEC.tv; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to
-#  the Free Software Foundation, 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
+#  the Free Software Foundation, 51 Franklin Street, Suite 500, Boston, MA 02110, USA.
 #  http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html
 ################################################################################
 
 . config/options $1
 
-mkdir -p $INSTALL/usr/lib
-  cp -P $PKG_BUILD/.libs/*.so* $INSTALL/usr/lib
+cd $BUILD
+mv iptv-${PKG_VERSION} ${PKG_NAME}-${PKG_VERSION}

packages/3rdparty/multimedia/vdr-live/build

@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+
+################################################################################
+#      This file is part of OpenELEC - http://www.openelec.tv
+#      Copyright (C) 2009-2012 Stephan Raue (stephan@openelec.tv)
+#
+#  This Program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+#  it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+#  the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+#  any later version.
+#
+#  This Program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+#  but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+#  MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+#  GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+#  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+#  along with OpenELEC.tv; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to
+#  the Free Software Foundation, 51 Franklin Street, Suite 500, Boston, MA 02110, USA.
+#  http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html
+################################################################################
+
+. config/options $1
+
+VDR_DIR=`basename $BUILD/vdr-[0-9]*`
+
+CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -fPIC"
+CXXFLAGS="$CXXFLAGS -fPIC"
+LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -fPIC"
+
+# dont build parallel
+  MAKEFLAGS=-j1
+
+cd $PKG_BUILD
+  PWD=`pwd`
+  make VDRDIR="$PWD/../$VDR_DIR" LIBDIR="." LOCALEDIR="./locale"

packages/3rdparty/multimedia/vdr-live/meta

@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+################################################################################
+#      This file is part of OpenELEC - http://www.openelec.tv
+#      Copyright (C) 2009-2012 Stephan Raue (stephan@openelec.tv)
+#
+#  This Program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+#  it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+#  the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+#  any later version.
+#
+#  This Program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+#  but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+#  MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+#  GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+#  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+#  along with OpenELEC.tv; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to
+#  the Free Software Foundation, 51 Franklin Street, Suite 500, Boston, MA 02110, USA.
+#  http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html
+################################################################################
+
+PKG_NAME="vdr-live"
+PKG_VERSION="0.2.0"
+PKG_REV="1"
+PKG_ARCH="any"
+PKG_LICENSE="GPL"
+PKG_SITE="http://live.vdr-developer.org/en/index.php"
+PKG_URL="http://live.vdr-developer.org/downloads/${PKG_NAME}-${PKG_VERSION}.tar.gz"
+PKG_DEPENDS="vdr"
+PKG_BUILD_DEPENDS="toolchain vdr tntnet"
+PKG_PRIORITY="optional"
+PKG_SECTION="multimedia"
+PKG_SHORTDESC="vdr-live: the LIVE Interactive VDR Environment/"
+PKG_LONGDESC="vdr-live allows a comfortable operation of VDR and some of its plugins trough a web interface"
+
+PKG_IS_ADDON="no"
+
+PKG_AUTORECONF="no"

packages/3rdparty/multimedia/vdr-live/patches/vdr-live-0.2.0-01_ipv6.patch

@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+Description: Allows to use IPV6 addresses
+Forwarded: not-needed
+Origin: vendor, http://bugs.debian.org/cgi-bin/bugreport.cgi?bug=630627#10
+Bug-Debian: http://bugs.debian.org/630627
+Author: Luboš Doležel <lubos@dolezel.info>
+
+--- live-0.2.0/setup.cpp.orig	2008-04-23 01:01:53.000000000 +0200
++++ live-0.2.0/setup.cpp	2011-06-15 20:22:36.577961061 +0200
+@@ -151,13 +151,28 @@
+ 
+ bool Setup::CheckServerIps()
+ {
++	bool v6supported = false;
++	int s = socket(AF_INET6, SOCK_STREAM, 0);
++	
++	if (s != -1) {
++		close(s);
++		v6supported = true;
++	}
++	
+ 	if ( m_serverIps.empty() ) {
+-		m_serverIps.push_back( "0.0.0.0" );
++		if (v6supported)
++			m_serverIps.push_back( "::" );
++		else
++			m_serverIps.push_back( "0.0.0.0" );
+ 		return true;
+ 	}
+ 
++        union {
++		in_addr in4;
++		in6_addr in6;
++	};
+ 	for ( IpList::const_iterator ip = m_serverIps.begin(); ip != m_serverIps.end(); ++ip ) {
+-		if ( inet_addr( ip->c_str() ) == static_cast< in_addr_t >( -1 ) ) {
++		if ( !inet_pton(AF_INET, ip->c_str(), &in4) && !inet_pton(AF_INET6, ip->c_str(), &in6) ) {
+ 			esyslog( "ERROR: live server ip %s is not a valid ip address", ip->c_str() );
+ 			cerr << "ERROR: live server ip " << *ip << " is not a valid ip address" << endl;
+ 			return false;

packages/3rdparty/multimedia/vdr-live/patches/vdr-live-0.2.0-02_timers_colon.patch

@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+#! /bin/sh /usr/share/dpatch/dpatch-run
+## 02_timers_colon.dpatch by Timo Weingärtner <timo@tiwe.de>
+##
+## All lines beginning with `## DP:' are a description of the patch.
+## DP: colons have to be replaced by pipes in timer titles.
+
+@DPATCH@
+--- vdr-plugin-live-0.2.0/timers.cpp	2008-04-10 22:06:05.000000000 +0200
++++ vdr-plugin-live-0.2.0.new/timers.cpp	2009-07-25 23:39:02.000000000 +0200
+@@ -138,7 +138,7 @@
+ 		ostringstream builder;
+ 		builder << flags << ":" << channel << ":" << ( weekdays != "-------" ? weekdays : "" )
+ 				<< ( weekdays == "-------" || day.empty() ? "" : "@" ) << day << ":" << start << ":" << stop << ":"
+-				<< priority << ":" << lifetime << ":" << title << ":" << aux;
++				<< priority << ":" << lifetime << ":" << StringReplace(title, ":", "|") << ":" << aux;
+ 		// dsyslog("%s", builder.str().c_str());
+ 
+ 		TimerPair timerData( timer, builder.str() );

packages/3rdparty/multimedia/vdr-live/patches/vdr-live-0.2.0-03_fix-INCLUDES.patch

@@ -0,0 +1,70 @@
+#! /bin/sh /usr/share/dpatch/dpatch-run
+## 03_live-0.2.0-fix-INCLUDES.dpatch by Thomas Günther <tom@toms-cafe.de>
+##
+## All lines beginning with `## DP:' are a description of the patch.
+## DP: Fixes compilation with VDR >= 1.7.13.
+
+@DPATCH@
+--- live-0.2.0/Makefile
++++ live-0.2.0/Makefile
+@@ -38,6 +38,7 @@
+ ### Allow user defined options to overwrite defaults:
+ 
+ -include $(VDRDIR)/Make.config
++EXTRA_INCLUDES = $(INCLUDES)
+ 
+ ### The version number of VDR's plugin API (taken from VDR's "config.h"):
+ 
+@@ -139,10 +140,10 @@
+ subdirs: $(SUBDIRS)
+ 
+ $(SUBDIRS):
+-	$(MAKE) -C $@ CXX="$(CXX)" CXXFLAGS="$(CXXFLAGS)" $(MAKECMDGOALS)
++	$(MAKE) -C $@ CXX="$(CXX)" CXXFLAGS="$(CXXFLAGS)" EXTRA_INCLUDES="$(EXTRA_INCLUDES)" $(MAKECMDGOALS)
+ 
+ PAGES:
+-	$(MAKE) -C pages CXX="$(CXX)" CXXFLAGS="$(CXXFLAGS)" .dependencies
++	$(MAKE) -C pages CXX="$(CXX)" CXXFLAGS="$(CXXFLAGS)" EXTRA_INCLUDES="$(EXTRA_INCLUDES)" .dependencies
+ 
+ $(VERSIONSUFFIX): FORCE
+ 	./buildutil/version-util $(VERSIONSUFFIX) || ./buildutil/version-util -F $(VERSIONSUFFIX)
+--- live-0.2.0/css/Makefile
++++ live-0.2.0/css/Makefile
+@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
+ CXXFLAGS += `tntnet-config --cxxflags`
+ LDFLAGS  += `tntnet-config --libs`
+ 
++INCLUDES += $(EXTRA_INCLUDES)
+ INCLUDES += -I..
+ 
+ ### The directory environment:
+--- live-0.2.0/httpd/Makefile
++++ live-0.2.0/httpd/Makefile
+@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
+ 
+ ### Includes and Defines (add further entries here):
+ 
++INCLUDES += $(EXTRA_INCLUDES)
+ INCLUDES += -I.
+ 
+ ### The object files (add further files here):
+--- live-0.2.0/javascript/Makefile
++++ live-0.2.0/javascript/Makefile
+@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
+ CXXFLAGS += `tntnet-config --cxxflags`
+ LDFLAGS  += `tntnet-config --libs`
+ 
++INCLUDES += $(EXTRA_INCLUDES)
+ INCLUDES += -I.. -I$(VDRDIR)/include
+ 
+ ### The directory environment:
+--- live-0.2.0/pages/Makefile
++++ live-0.2.0/pages/Makefile
+@@ -2,6 +2,7 @@
+ AR       ?= ar
+ ECPPC    ?= ecppc
+ 
++INCLUDES += $(EXTRA_INCLUDES)
+ INCLUDES += -I.. -I$(VDRDIR)/include
+ 
+ ### The directory environment:

packages/3rdparty/multimedia/vdr-live/patches/vdr-live-0.2.0-04_tntnet-2.0.patch

@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+Index: vdr-plugin-live-0.2.0/thread.cpp
+===================================================================
+--- vdr-plugin-live-0.2.0.orig/thread.cpp	2011-08-25 21:58:33.000000000 +0200
++++ vdr-plugin-live-0.2.0/thread.cpp	2011-08-25 21:58:37.000000000 +0200
+@@ -3,6 +3,7 @@
+ #include <stdexcept>
+ #include <vdr/tools.h>
+ #include <tnt/tntnet.h>
++#include <tnt/tntconfig.h>
+ #include "thread.h"
+ #include "tntconfig.h"
+ 

packages/3rdparty/multimedia/vdr-live/patches/vdr-live-0.2.0-05_do-not-use-the-direct-access-to-crecoding.patch

@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+From 94a0a210a485ce1fc95c47a6bc67c4c16c89a0f9 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
+From: Dieter Hametner
+Date: Sun, 25 Mar 2012 14:42:12 +0000
+Subject: Updated LIVE to latest changes in vdr 1.7.27
+
+- Do not use the direct access to cRecoding members any more.
+---
+diff --git a/epg_events.cpp b/epg_events.cpp
+index a514769..cd4996e 100644
+--- a/epg_events.cpp
++++ b/epg_events.cpp
+@@ -182,12 +182,20 @@ namespace vdrlive
+ 
+ 	time_t EpgRecording::GetStartTime() const
+ 	{
++#if VDRVERSNUM < 10726
+ 		return m_recording ? m_recording->start : 0;
++#else
++		return m_recording ? m_recording->Start() : 0;
++#endif
+ 	}
+ 
+ 	time_t EpgRecording::GetEndTime() const
+ 	{
++#if VDRVERSNUM < 10726
+ 		return m_recording ? m_recording->start : 0;
++#else
++		return m_recording ? m_recording->Start() : 0;
++#endif
+ 	}
+ 
+ 	const string EpgRecording::Name() const
+diff --git a/recman.cpp b/recman.cpp
+index fb315d2..6a2fc00 100644
+--- a/recman.cpp
++++ b/recman.cpp
+@@ -383,7 +383,11 @@ namespace vdrlive {
+ 
+ 	time_t RecordingsItemRec::StartTime() const
+ 	{
++#if VDRVERSNUM < 10726
+ 		return m_recording->start;
++#else
++		return m_recording->Start();
++#endif
+ 	}
+ 
+ 	long RecordingsItemRec::Duration() const
+--
+cgit v0.9.0.2-40-g7c79